Sharp MX-2615N-3115N SM
Sharp MX-2615N-3115N SM
Sharp MX-2615N-3115N SM
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX3115/S1E
MODEL MX-2615N/3115N
CONTENTS
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
Disengage the
pawl.
MX-3115N
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only)
11-13/16"
• When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
(30cm) procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
1. System diagram
0;1
0;1
',*,7$/)8//&2/25
08/7,)81&7,21$/6<67(0
0;751
(;,775$<81,7
0;)1 0;31$%&'
),1,6+(5 381&+02'8/( 0;/7
/21*3$3(5)((',1*75$<
*1: The printable area for A3W/12" x 18" must be as large as the
A3/11" x 17" page full bleed (299 x 450mm).
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
(4) Engine resolution Scanner Single: 50-sheet/min. Single: 50-sheet/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Resolution*1 Copy Writing Double: 20-page/min. Double: 20-page/min. (200
600 x 600dpi (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) x 200dpi, 8bit)
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
Print Writing direction
600 x 600dpi Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi position random feeding)
Gradation *2 Copy Writing Original transport Sheet-through method
(256 levels) 600 x 600dpi x 4bit method
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Original size Standard size
Print Writing Inch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
PCL: 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
600 x 600dpi x 1bit Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
600 x 600dpi x 4bit 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
PS: 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
600 x 600dpi x 1bit AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
600 x 600dpi x 4bit A4R, B5, B5R, A5
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
*1: Resolustion: 600dpi (default) AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8 bit input will be A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
performed. AB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
(5) Scanner section AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
a. Resolution/Gradation A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Long 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Scanning Monochrome Color paper Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm.
Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper
600 x 400dpi is not available.
600 x 300dpi (default) Mix paper feed Enabled
RSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi (Same series,
600 x 400dpi (default) same width paper)
Exposure lamp White LED Random feeding Enabled
(feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are
Reading gradation 10bit
types / different allowed:
Output gradation BW: 1bit
widths) A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5;
Grayscale: 8bit
and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
scanning is disabled during random feeding.
b. Document table Original copy Single:
weight Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed) Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (39 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
11", 600 x 400dpi) / 26 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x
Original standard Left rear reference
11", 600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper.
position
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Detection Yes
Max. loading Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
Detection size Automatic detection (One type of detection unit to capacity of height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
be switched for software destination) documents
Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts Un-acceptable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
heater (Scanner originals for paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
section) feeding. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
(6) Document feeder perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
Detection Yes
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
Paper detection Auto detection
(A4/8.5" x 11")
size
Copy Single: Single:
Paper feeding Right hand feeding
50-sheet/min. 36-sheet/min.
direction
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
Finish stamp Option
36-sheet/min. Double:
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) 17-page/min.
Double: (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
20-page/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
17-page/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Internet FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
(7) Paper feed section b. Extra paper capacity
a. Basic specifications Paper type Paper feed tray Manual feed tray
Postcard NA 20 sheets
Type Standard 1-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
Envelope NA 20 sheets
tray
OHP NA 20 sheets
Full option 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
tray Heavy paper 200 sheets 40 sheets
Dehumidifying Service parts (Supported by kit) Tab paper NA 20 sheets
heater Glossy paper NA 1 sheet
Others NA 1 sheet
Main Manual
Optional Drawer
unit tray paper
Paper feed section
feed
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
tray
Paper 12" x 18" (A3W) - - - - Yes
size 11" x 17" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 14" (216 x 356) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13" (216 x 330) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
7.25" x 10.5"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5.5" x 8.5"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16KR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
JPC *1 - - - - Yes
Envelope - - - - Yes
Custom Yes Yes - - Yes
Long paper - - - - Yes
Width: 125-297mm
Length: 433-1200mm
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
Main Manual
Optional Drawer
unit tray paper
Paper feed section
feed
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
tray
Paper Thin paper 13-16lb bond (55-59g/m2) No No No No Yes
type Plain paper 16-28lb bond (60-105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28lb bond - 110lb index (106-209g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
110lb index-140lb index (210-256g/m2) - - - - Yes
Envelope 75-90g/m2 - - - - Yes
OHP Transparency - - - - Yes
Label - - - - Yes
Tab paper - - - - Yes
Grossy paper - - - - Yes
User settings 1 - 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
(9) Operation panel (12) Warm-up time
Size 7 inch Main power SW
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel Warm-up time*1 18sec. or less
Display dot number 800 x 480 dots (WVGA) Pre heat Yes
LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system Jam recovery time*2 37sec. or less
C. Printer function
(1) Printer driver supported OS
Sharp Advanced
OS Custom PCL6 Custom PS PPD PC-FAX
Printing Language
Windows XP CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
XP (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac X 10.4.11 No No CD-ROM No No
X 10.5-10.5.8 No No CD-ROM No Web
X 10.6-10.6.8 No No CD-ROM No Web
X 10.7-10.7.2 No No CD-ROM No Web
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
D. FAX function (6) Dial
(1) Transmission method Manual dialing To be entered by 10-key, # key, * key
Re-dialing The previous 8 items (max.) can be saved, and
Transmission time Less than 3 sec (Super G3) one of them can be selected.
Less than 7 sec (G3 ECM) One-touch call is available.
Compression/ MH, MR, MMR, JBIG One-touch dialing 1000 items including the group dialing items
expansion system (Fixed to ECM for MMR or JBIG.)
Group dialing 1000 items including the one-touch dialing
Modem speed 33.6kbps o 2.4kbps automatic fallback items
Resolution 8 x 3.85 line/mm, 8 x 7.7 line/mm, Program dialing Max. 48 items
8.15.4 line/mm, 16 x 15.4 line/mm (Standard
Chain dialing Max. 64 digits including one-touch dialing,
memory is used for transmit/receive.)
10-key dialing, and pause.
Intercommunication G3/Super G3: Standard (V.34, V.17, V.33, V.29,
Dial search Alphabet order search, User index groups
V.27ter)
Quick search Yes
Communication line General telephone line (PSTN), ISDN (When TA
LDAP search Yes
is installed.) Private Branch Exchange (PBX)
Sub address Yes
ECM Yes
Password Yes
(2) Number of Support Line Memory box registration Yes
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
Transmit Long length original transmit Only when RSPF is used. Special FAST Yes
function Transmission is enable up to function Facsimile Automated Service
1000mm. Technology
Mixed documents function Only when RSPF is used. Time adjust function Yes
Zoom transmit Yes Summer time ON/OFF
2 in 1 transmit Yes PC-FAX Yes
Card shot transmit Only when transmitting from Color mode No
OC Sender registration function Yes
Thin paper scan function Available except for duplex Number of registration: 1 for
scan standard sender name and
Edge erase transmit function Yes address. And 18 sender
Only for the fixed sizes names can be registered.
Job build Yes Default destination setting No
Page division transmit Yes Unauthorized scan Yes
Cover No prevention function
Index No Filing-each-page function No
Transmit message adding No Re-operation function Yes
function User account function Yes
Receive Auto receive Yes Max. 200 items additionally
function to the default
Manual receive Yes
Counter function Yes
DRD call function Distinctive Ring Detection
North America: Standard,
Pattern 1 – 5
Australia/New Zealand/Hong E. Image send function
Kong: ON/OFF (TEL/FAX)
Memory receive Yes (1) Mode
Transfer function Yes
Number of registration: 1 Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct SMTP
item suport mode E-mail/FTP server/SMB
Specified receive function Yes (Number of registration) Desktop/USB Memory
Rejection numbers: Max.50
items
(2) System environment
Receive data print condition Yes
Copier memory (Local memory) Printer memory (System Memory)
function
1GB (Standard) 512MB (Standard)
Receive Receive data staple setting/ Yes
function Copy number setting
(3) Support System
Rotation receive Yes
Output by clockwise rotation
of 90 degrees Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
Divided receive Yes SMTP
Divided print is not made in Compression server SMTP/SMTP-SSL POP3 server
duplex mode. protocol FTP(TCP/IP)/FTPS SMTP server
Duplex receive Yes SMB*1 ESMTP server
F-code confidential receive Yes HTTP/HTTPS
Special Print hold Yes
*1 Network environment for SMB
function Document Admin Yes
Inbound Routing Yes (4) Supported image
Sender registration function Yes
Sender print function Yes
Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
On-hook dialing function Yes SMTP
Retransmit function Yes Format / method Mono 2gradation : Monochrome :
Pause function Yes TIFF/PDF/Encrypted TIFF-FX (TIFF-F/
Pause time is 1 – 15 sec. PDF/XPS TIFF-S)
Sound volume setting Yes Color/Grayscale : Color/Grayscale :
function Color TIFF/JPEG/PDF N/A
Tone pulse select function Tone, Pulse, Auto Encrypted PDF/XPS
(North America/Taiwan) Compression method Mono 2gradation : Monochrome :
* For the other destinations, Non-compression G3 MH / G4 MMR
set with the soft switch. G3 MH / G4 MMR Color/Grayscale :
External phone connection Yes Color/Grayscale : N/A
Memory remaining capacity Yes JPEG (high/middle/
check function Only the integral part is low)
displayed.
Back up Yes (5) Specification of Addresses
Registered data read/write Yes
function Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
Report/List Yes SMTP
Destination check function Yes Max. number of Total 1000 keys
Broadcasting destination Yes registrations FTP/Desktop/SMB address shall be the same as
display function those for other modes. Maximum 1000 addresses
Transmit job change function Yes shall be able tobe registered
Save-energy function Yes Number of addresses Max. 500 addresses
can be registered in
Line monitor display function Yes
one Group key
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 7
Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct Moving time to pre- 1 minutes (default)
SMTP heat mode
Number of addresses 5000 addresses (included in the 1000 keys) Recovery time from 10 sec.
can be registered by pre-heat mode
inputting directly in Moving time to sleep 1 minutes (default)
Group keys mode * Printer mode: 10sec.(default)
Registration using the YES YES Recovery time from 18 sec.
LDAP search results sleep mode
Import/export of the YES YES
address book *1: Power switch ON, dehumidity heater OFF
Disable registering YES YES
destination from
operation panel G. Dimensions and Weight
Disable registering YES YES
destination on Web Outer dimension (Included W608 x D642 x H834mm
page operation panel)
Disable regisstration Yes Yes Footprint W608 x D642mm (excluded bypass tray)
using network W876 x D642mm (included bypass tray)
scanner tool Dimension occupied by the W928 x D642mm
Disable [RESEND] on Yes Yes machine (When the bypass
Image send mode tray is extended)
Disable selection from Yes Yes Weight 76.2kg (200V)
address book Main Unit (including 75.6kg (100V)
photoreceptor / not including
Disable direct entry Yes Yes
consumables)
(6) Function
H. Ambient conditions
Function Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
(Humidity)
SMTP
Job Build YES YES 85%
Slow scan mode YES YES
60%
Mixed size original YES YES
Original count YES YES AREA 1
Edge erase Yes (Edge/Side) Yes (Edge/Side)
Dual page scan YES YES
Card shot Yes (Ration: 63-400%) Yes (Ration: 63-400%)
20%
Time specified send Yes Yes AREA 2
Blank page skip Yes N/A 5%
Filling Yes Yes
Quick file Yes Yes 5 °C
Multi shot N/A Yes 10 °C 30 °C 35 °C (Temperature)
Preview Yes Yes
F. Power consumption
The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 8
MX-3115N
Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Black toner) x1 24K MX-36NT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area
(Black) coverage 5%
(Reference: 20K for A4/Letter
6%)
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) x1 15K MX-36NT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area
(Cyan) coverage 5%
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) x1 15K MX-36NT-MA 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) x1 15K MX-36NT-YA 10
(Yellow)
Developer (Black) Developer (Black developer) x1 840K MX-36NV-BA 10 Developer
rotaion Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 840K MX-36NV-SA 10 BK:26cpm120K / 31cpm 135K
(Cyan/Magenta/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow: 3 colors/set) rotaion CMY:26/31cpm 120K
Yellow: 3 colors/set) (Developer (each colors)) Maximum Printable number
BK:26cpm 140K / 31cpm 155K
CMY:26/31cpm 140K
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 200K 10
Fuser belt guide collar x2
Pressure roller kit MX-230LH Fusing roller x1 200K 10
Pressure roller x1
Web cleaning kit MX-360WB Web roller x1 200K 10
Web guide shaft x2
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
Primary transfer belt kit MX-230B1 Primary transfer belt AR x1 200K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-230TL Primary transfer blade AR x1 200K 10
PTC kit MX-230CU PTC unit x1 200K 10
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-230B2 Secondary transfer belt D3 x1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-361FL Ozone filter x1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-230HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) x1 50K 10 5% coverage for each
color; 25% color ratio
Main charger kit MX-230MK Main charger unit x1 Drum 10
Cleaning gum AS AR x1 840K
Cleaning blade AR x1 Rotation
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FN17
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 — 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-230U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 — 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-230U2 Secondary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 — 1
Fusing unit MX-361FU1 Fusing unit (For servicing rotation: Heater lamp 120V) x1 — 1
When shipping, the parts are packed in the unit of 10 sets. In the market, however, they are treated in the unit of 1 set.
Model name: Composed of the parts of 1 set
1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
85%
C. M .Y 60%
20%
C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.
1. External view
02).4
2%!$9
$!4!
)-!'% 3%.$
,).%
$!4!
,/'/54
3#/6
300$ 30%$ 30,3
300$ 30,3
3073
3/#$
300$ 300$
/#37
-(03
4&$
4&$
0/$
0/$
7%"%.$
2%'3?&)-'$3 4(?5-?).
2%'3?2 4(?,-?).
45$?#, 45$?+
$(0$?#, $(0$?+
!00$
45$
00$ -0,$
4#3?9 4#3?- 4#3?# 4#3?+
-073
4(?,35
-0%$
(5$?-4(?-
"$ 00$ 4.&$
#,5$ #0&$
#0%$
#33 $37?#
#30$
07237
$(37
-37 $37?&
$37?2
34-03 322#
3023
452#?
7%"3 452#?
452#
-0&3
0&#?(0&#
#05#
#0&#
30&-
30- 305-
02-
/3- 4.-?9
-)- 4.-?-
4.-?#
4.-?+
0/- 0'-
$6-?#,
!$5-
&5- $6-?+
22-
0&-
#0&-
#,5-
39 40 38 37 36 34 35 33 42 41 44 43
26
25
47
48
28
27
19
20
18
17
30
31
32
29
15
16
22
21
13
14
23
24
9
10
46
45
11
12
8
7
6
1
2
3 5 4
#,?/.
##&4
$,?9
$,?-
$,?#
$,?"+
(,?5-53
(,?,-
0/&-
03&-
0/&-
02/&-
&5&-
02/&-
$(3
&
&
&
&
&
& &
& &
& &
43?53
43?5-
43 ,-
2. Details of adjustment
40mm
MM
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
40mm
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0 display.
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B< Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause, and perform set-
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
ting again.
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
Error
. & 0 < (;(&87( Error name Detail of error
display
K EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 1.0V, or control
voltage over 8.0V.
M
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 2.3V, or control
EXECUTE voltage less than 2.0V.
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 1.65 r 0.13V
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
&/26(
5) Cancel SIM 25-2.
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
6) Confirm that "Install the toner cartridge" is displayed, and
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0 install the toner cartridge by the following procedures.
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0
$7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9(92B0B0
8) Open the front cabinet, and insert each toner cartridge.
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&'B&
7&'B0(((/
7&'B<
7&9B.(((/
7&9B&(((/
7&9B0(((/
7&9B<(((/
BK
C
M
Y
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) K 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) C 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) M 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Y 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) K 150 - 850 –610Vr5V
B LOW SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) C 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
C LOW SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) M 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Y 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC/DV
speed mode, and press [OK] key. high voltage power PWB.
Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high
on the label attached on the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the
adjustment value.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable to put
down the adjustment value in advance.
The default values specified for each model must be changed
as follows.
26cpm/31cpm machine: +5 When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
checking the print image quality.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B&
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the
procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
EXECUTE When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec. Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC/DV
high voltage power PWB.
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B. adjustment value.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B&
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted. meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
checking the print image quality.
Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_K (Middle
speed mode)
B MIDDLE Developing C 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_C (Middle
speed mode)
C MIDDLE Developing M 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_M (Middle
speed mode)
D MIDDLE Developing Y 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_Y (Middle
speed mode)
LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_K (Low speed
mode)
B LOW Developing C 0 - 600 –430V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_C (Low speed
mode)
C LOW Developing M 0 - 600 –430V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_M (Low speed
mode)
D LOW Developing Y 0 - 600 –430V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_Y (Low speed
mode)
*˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/<
.˖
˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
˖7&3/$,1&/63;
/˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/.
$˖ %˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/.
'˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/&
(˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/0
)˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/0
*˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/<
+˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/<
,˖ ˖7&/2:63(('%:.
-˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
.˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/63;
/˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
Actual
Setting Default
Item/Display Content output
range value
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer Color K Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias adjustment Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C value C Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
M
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
K
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 103 –40PA
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX bias adjustment paper Back surface 51 - 255 90 –30PA
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX value Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 103 –40PA
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 90 –30PA
O TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 83 –25PA
P TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX paper 1 Back surface 51 - 255 76 –20PA
Q TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 69 –15PA
R TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 69 –15PA
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 51 - 255 83 –25PA
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
U TC2 OHP CL Color OHP 51 - 255 69 –15PA
V TC2 OHP BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
W TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color Envelope 51 - 255 69 –15PA
X TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
Y TC2 THIN CL Color Thin paper 51 - 255 103 –40PA
Z TC2 THIN BW Black/White 51 - 255 103 –40PA
AA TC2 GLOSSY CL Color Gloss paper 51 - 255 83 –25PA
AB TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
AC TC2 CLEANING Secondary transfer Cleaning process (negative pole) 51 - 255 59 –8PA
AD TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD cleaning bias Low speed print mode 0 - 255 26 0V
AE TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD adjustment value Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 26 0V
AF TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning bias (positive pole) 0 - 255 102 500V
AG PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current Color Low speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AH PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL adjustment value Middle speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AI PTC LOW SPEED BW Black/White Low speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AJ PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AK CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC voltage Color Low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AL CASE VOLT MID CL adjustment value Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AM CASE VOLT LOW BW Black/White Low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AN CASE VOLT MID BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value), and press [OK] key.
3&6B./('$'- 5(*B5*51'
3&6B&/'$5.
3&6B.'$5.
5(*B)%(/70$;
5(*B)%(/70,1 ADJ 4 Image lead edge position,
3&6B.*51'
3&6B.%(/70$;
5(*B)%(/7',)
5(*B5%(/70$;
image loss, void area, image
3&6B.%(/70,1
3&6B.%(/7',)
5(*B5%(/70,1
5(*B5%(/7',)
off-center, image magnification
5(*B)/('$'-
5(*B5/('$'-
5(*B)3$7&+ .
5(*B)3$7&+ &
ratio adjustment
5(*B)'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+ 0 (Automatic adjustment)
5(*B5'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+ <
(;(&87( The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. * ADJ 15
The sensitivity adjustments of the color image density sensor Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off-
(image registration sensor F) and the black image density sen- center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
sor (image registration sensor R) are automatically performed. * ADJ 16
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
* ADJ 17
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
played.
* ADJ 18
Mode Error display Error content Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Adjustment BK_SEN_ Black image PCS_K LED ADJ error (Manual adjustment)
value for ADJ_ERR density sensor (The target value is not
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
process adjustment obtained after retried
control abnormality three times.)
Display/Item Content
operation CL_SEN_ Color image PCS_CL LED ADJ error
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
mode ADJ_ERR density sensor (The target value is not
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
adjustment obtained after retried
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
abnormality three times.)
adjustment
BELT_READ Transfer belt PCS_K GRND error (The
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
_ERR surface surface detection level is
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
reading maximum or the minimum
abnormality value difference is SETUP/ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper
outside a reference PRINT ADJ feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
range.) RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjust-
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
ment pattern.
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
%.0$*
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($' 2))6(7
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
$// The following item is automatically adjustment.
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
4-C Copy mode image lead edge position,
image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following items can
(Document table mode)
be executed individually.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are 7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
3/($6(386+&$.(<
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4-D Copy mode image lead edge position,
The adjustment pattern is printed out. image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
(RSPF mode)
Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjust-
ment pattern.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
12:(;(&87,1*
Color registration adjustment 0 / 1*
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(
Abnormal end
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
(55257211(5(037<
(;(&87(
Contents in ( )
MIAN, SUB: Difference from the previous adjustment value of
image registration.
Example: When the adjustment is made by turning the LSU skew adjustment
screw of K, the states of C, M and Y (SKEW) are changed. Execute
If 105 for this time and 103 for the previous time,
SIM50-22 to check to confirm that C, M, and Y (SKEW) are OK.
it is displayed as 105.0 (+2.0).
When an abnormality occurs, "ERROR" is displayed.
SKEW, ALL_ROTATE: Judgment of the LSU skew adjustment
result. OK or NG. In this case, check each drive section and the process section.
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value of the previous
time The adjustment result can be checked by the following manual
5) If the display of ALL_ROTATE is NG, turn all the LSU skew adjustment mode.
adjustment screws to adjust, and perform the procedures 2) to * ADJ 5B
4). Image skew adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIM50-20)
Repeat the procedures 2) to 5) until the display of * ADJ 5C
ALL_ROTATE becomes OK. If the display of ALL_ROTATE is
Color registration offset adjustment (SIM50-20)
OK, go to the procedure 6).
For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
toner box, and turn the skew adjustment screw.
When the color registration is greatly shifted due to replacement of
the LSU, etc, if SIM50-22 is used to perform the color registration
automatic adjustment, an error may occur.
In this case, the adjustment may be properly executed by setting
the adjustment items A - I of SIM50-20 to "100" and executing the
automatic adjustment again.
If color shift in an actual print image differs in the center, the front
side, and the rear side, the color shift offset adjustment can
improve it. (Refer to ADJ 5C.)
Normally there is a difference in color shift in several dots. Perform
the adjustment only when the adjustment is required.
A B
Diagonal Diagonal
line C line D (Skew adjustment screw rotation direction)
About 220mm
When C is greater than D in the method 1 or there is some
skew in the direction A in the method 2, turn the screw clock-
wise.
When C is smaller than D in the method 1 or there is some
skew in the direction B in the method 2, turn the screw coun-
terclockwise.
(Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment
screw)
About 300mm In case of the method 1, 0.8mm/about 1.5 rotations
In case of the method 2, 0.5mm/about 1.5 rotations
Method 1
Repeat the procedures 2) to 6).
Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
pattern. After completion of the black image skew adjustment, go to the
procedure 7).
Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and
D of the diagonal lines. 6) Perform the same procedures as 1) and 2).
Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the 7) Check the printed color image for any skew.
following range. If the difference between the shift amounts on the F and R
C - D = 0.8mm sides is within r 1 scale of the fine adjustment check scale,
there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust. Measure the skew amount from the print patterns on the front
and rear sides of each color.
Method 2
Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the rect-
angle print pattern. R side
Measure the slant (skew) of the vertical side for the horizontal
side of paper as shown in the figure.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
5) Open the front cover, remove the waste toner box, and turn the
four LSU image skew adjustment screws in the same direction
by the same amount.
For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
toner box, and turn the skew adjustment screw. F side
When the adjustment value of OFF SET X F and OFF SET X R are
B-main A-main changed, the color at the center area will be affected. Consider this
when executing the adjustment.
Y1
L = 10mm
30mm
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
La Lb
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)
is satisfied.
A B
a b
2.
Check Method 2 2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
1.0mm. 3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
0 - 1.0mm
If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the pro-
cedure 3).
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖'(1%+9
/˖ ˖ 08/7,&2817
4.0 1.0mm
(;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
6) Change the adjustment value.
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6 Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
[EXECUTE] key.
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
.˖ ˖'(1%+9
printed.
/˖ ˖08/7,&2817
(;(&87( 2. When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
in it. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Setting Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
Display/Item Content Default
range
A DEN-C Printer lead edge image 1 - 99 30
position adjustment
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 ADJ 10 Color balance/density
adjustment adjustment
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
adjustment (1) Note before execution of the color balance/density
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50 adjustment
area adjustment correction * Requisite conditions before execution of the color balance/den-
value sity adjustment
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
Before execution of the color balance/density adjustment, check
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
to insure that the adjustments which affect the color balance/den-
adjustment correction value sity have been completed properly.
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 The importance levels of them are shown below.
adjustment correction value (Since the following items affect the color balance/density
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 directly, they must be adjusted or set before execution of the
adjustment correction value image quality adjustments.)
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
vent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
as possible.
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed. Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
Void Void
Resolution Resolution
Background density
Resolution Registration
Void Void
Void Void
Resolution Resolution
Resolution
Void Void
Low-density gradation
Background density
Resolution Resolution
Void Void
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low High
Low density High density
density density
Y Y
M M
C C
Bk
Bk
CMY
blend CMY
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q blend
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust- target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
method using the SIT chart.
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user's desired
Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or target level. In advance, the user's unique color
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document table. balance must be registered as the service color
balance target. The above registration (setting)
is made by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to
adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1. register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, therefore, the service color balance target is
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, changed, the color balance target of the user's
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display. color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color
balance is set to the factory color balance target
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( set with SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 setting) of the color balance is same as the
6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) (gamma) target When the service color balance
target target is changed, this color balance target is
also changed accordingly.
(;(&87(
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- (Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
ment ((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). purpose of registration)
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. customized with SIM 46-21.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with required.
SIM 63-11.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
46-74/46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an (KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q
adjustment. (MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode. judged as abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 7) Press [OK] key.
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
*+,-. ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
㩺㪣012
get.
. & 0 < 6(783 This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
3) Press [SETUP] key. by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly get with SIM 63-7.
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 10C (2)) on the docu- be sure to execute this procedure.
ment table.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that
the printed pattern is normal.
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to
balance (gamma) select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which emphasizes color
target reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance (gamma) balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman with SIM
target 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color balance
target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM 67-28 is
executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory color
balance target.
C User color balance Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this color balance
(gamma) target target is also changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/76-24)
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
• Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjust- If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
SIM 67-26. judged as follows.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) abnormal.
(SIM 46-74/67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
target is changed, this target is also changed accordingly. adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
purpose of registration) adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
customized with SIM 67-25. The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
required. SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man- a. Setting procedure
ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27 (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
to register the service color balance target data by use of the service color balance target)
printed adjustment pattern. 1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
with SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine. If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
discoloration and dirt. adjustment.
The service color balance target data is basically registered imme-
diately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25.
/012 This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
get with SIM 67-27.
When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-26,
be sure to execute this procedure.
1) Enter the SIM 67-28 mode.
. & 0 < 6(783
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3) Press [SETUP] key. 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
%&'() a. General
*+,-.
/012
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
. & 0 < 5(3($7 2.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is ment individually.
judged as abnormal.
The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again. adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
7) Press [OK] key. Black automatically.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust- When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar- of all the copy/printer modes are revised.
get.
Start
Execute ADJ10B Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (automatic density). (SIM46-74)
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM63-11)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*2) NO
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color YES
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( and prints the color balance check patch image.
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
352&21(;(&87,1* If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
Low High
density density
(;(&87(
Y
(adjustment pattern).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
&21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;(
$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
PRINTER CALIBRATION
PRINTER CALIBRATION
$M
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
2.
5(68/7 5(75<
10-C (1)
Copy color balance and density adjustment
(Automatic adjustment)
The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both a. General
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
completed. adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
Black automatically.
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (automatic
adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
adjustment result is invalid. of all the copy modes are revised.
11) Check the copy color balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
check.) ment.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained 1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in is used.)
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1). mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 10C reduce the number of service calls.
(2)). If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
10C (2)). work effectively.
12) Check the printer color balance and density. If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density lem occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained,
check.) service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in understood.
procedure 7), change the factory color balance target with SIM
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 10E (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
10E (2)).
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
Start
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*3) Automatic color balance target change
End
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
Low High
density density
Y
M
(;(&87(
C
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
automatically selected.) Bk
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
played. This operation takes several minutes.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- MODE" is displayed.
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
balance, select the service target. MODE" is displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 10-C (2)
5(68/7
Copy color balance and density adjustment
&203/(7( (Manual adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of CMYK. This is used at the following situ-
ation. When the result of auto adjustment described above is not
existing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is
required. When there is request from the user for changing (cus-
5(68/7 (;(&87(
tomizing) the color balance.
This manual adjustment is executed only for the color patch which
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
efficiency.
(55256(1625$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
Start
YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
YES
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the halftone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
End
˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17 If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
'˖ ˖32,17
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
*˖ ˖32,17 pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
+˖ ˖32,17 converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
,˖ ˖32,17
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
target is DEF 1.)
/˖ ˖32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
C 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
10-key EXECUTE
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
EXECUTE End of print density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$// &2/25 @
$˖ ˖32,17
fied.
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
,˖ ˖32,17 way of adjustment.
-˖ ˖32,17
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is 0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
automatically selected.) ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
balance is satisfactory. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the halftone
If not, execute the following procedures. image correction.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
Low High
density density
;
%
(;(&87(
$M
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
CMY pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 5(68/7
&203/(7( &203/(7(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 (55256(1625$'-8670(17
(5525.&0<
(;(&87(
5(68/7 (;(&87(
(;(&87(
*1: Text Printed Photo / Copy document, Text Printed Photo only
*2: Printer RGB save o FAX resend only
*3: Printer RGB save only
*4: Only the watermark is related.
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
+˖ ˖0$3
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
+˖ ˖0$3
/˖ ˖/,*+7
/2: +,*+ 2.
*˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal-
+˖ ˖32,17
ance and the density for each density level (point).
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17 6) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17 Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
[SYSTEM Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
EXECUTE SETTINGS] key mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
EXECUTE ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
or end of print
(˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
density level in each monochrome copy mode.
+˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17 * When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
* When there is request from the user.
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
-˖ ˖32,17 mode document density scanning
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
operation (exposure operation) conditions
(;(&87( 2. setting (Normally no need to set)
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
10-key EXECUTE ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
EXECUTE or end of print When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
ment, change the setting.
This setting is required in the following cases.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$// %: @3* * When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖
automatic copy mode.
%˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 * When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
'˖ ˖32,17
* When a document with colored background is copied.
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
-˖ ˖32,17
(;32685(02'(6(783 %:$(
.˖ ˖32,17 $(B02'( ˖ 02'( 02'(
/˖ ˖32,17 $(B6723B&23< ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
(;(&87( 2. $(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
$(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll $(B:,'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57
key.
AE WIDTH = PART
RSPF mode
3 to 7mm
10-D (6)
Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
2. 2.
10-key 10-key
OK OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
(˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
(˖ ˖)$;˖2&
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
)˖ ˖)$;˖563)
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
2.
2.
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key. 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. Set
Display/Item Content Default
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the value
background and the low density image is increased. When the A COLOR COPY : Text print (color copy) 1-9 3
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
ground and the low density image is decreased. B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
Display/Item Content Set value Default PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
(color copy)
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print (color copy)
(COPY TO COPY)
10-D (7)
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, Text 1-9 5
Copy/Scan low density image density (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
adjustment (for each mode) J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
(No need to adjust normally) PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
sity area in the copy/scanner mode. PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
This adjustment is required in the following cases. L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the M COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
image of the document. N COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
* When there is request from the user.
O COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 3
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode. TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
P COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
2.
10-key
OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
2.
Adjust- ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Display/Item 7(67 &/26(
Content ment Default &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
(Copy mode) $˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
range
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;7 6/23(
(SLOPE) gamma skew '˖ ˖&2/257(;7 ,17(5&(37
adjustment (˖ ˖('7(;7 6/23(
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of '˖ ˖&2/257(;7 ,17(5&(37
10-D (10)
Color copy mode dark area gradation (black
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( component quantity) adjustment
(No need to adjust normally)
10-key
DEFAULT
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode.
OK (except character and line image)
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
changes.
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖5*
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
$˖ %˖ ˖%*
* When reproduction as solid of black image is required.
˷̚˹
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
EXECUTE NO
7(;7ǂ357 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17('ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖5* ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
$˖ %˖ ˖%* 3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˷̚˹
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$3 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
(-)LUT2
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
YES
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 7(;7ǂ357 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
$˖ ˖5* 7(;7 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
$˖ %˖ ˖%*
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
˷̚˹
35,17('ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$3 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
$˖ %˖ ˖$87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
(˖ ˖6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
*˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
+˖ ˖%:&23<21
,˖ ˖&2/25386+5*%21
-˖ ˖%:386+21
2.
10-key
OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(//
$˖ %˖ ˖$87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
(˖ ˖6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
*˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
+˖ ˖%:&23<21
,˖ ˖&2/25386+5*%21
-˖ ˖%:386+21
2.
(˖ ˖<(//2:ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
2. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
10-key
Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If these val-
OK
ues are changed, density of the high density part is changed.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy color bal-
ance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$˖ ˖&0<˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
$˖ %˖ ˖.˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
(˖ ˖<(//2:ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
2.
2.
& 0 < 2.
10-key 10-key
OK OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783 (;32685($'-8670(17 63)
$˖ ˖5(' $˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖*5((1 $˖ %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
& 0 < 2. 2.
2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key. When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D
(COPY HIGH)".
Default
Display/Item Adjustment range Setting
C M Y Item/Display Content Default
range
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
adjustment (Low density side)
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
D YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
adjustment (Low density side)
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
C FAX : LOW PSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
F CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0 adjustment (Low density side)
5) Press [OK] key. D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density side)
6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
copy. adjustment (Low density side)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
and change the adjustment value. adjustment (High density side)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
10-D (15)
Automatic color balance adjustment by the This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
user (Copy color balance automatic with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
adjustment ENABLE setting and
1) Enter the system setting mode.
adjustment)
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
a. General
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density). 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
tion with SIM 26-53. 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
cedure 4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as
This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's under- shown in the figure.
standing on the automatic adjustment of the copy color balance At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
and density and the user's operational ability are judged adequate patch image (adjustment pattern).
enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully explained Thin line
to the user.
b. Setting procedure
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612 is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
˷̚˹ the display returns to the original operation screen.
To execute the printer color balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.
2.
10-key
OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚˹
2.
10-E (1)
Printer color balance adjustment
(Automatic adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
Start
YES
Execute ADJ10E(2) (Printer color balance and density
adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*3)
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and
*1:
density adjustment.
When the color balance and density are customized and
registered as the SERVICE target, select the SERVICE
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print target.
check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the *2:
printer color balance and density. printer color balance and density. If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
*3:
Are the color balance and NO If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
density at the satisfactory with ADJ10E(2) (Printer color balance and density
level? adjustment) (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the
print engine for any problems.
*4:
YES If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
(;(&87(
2.
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key. After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- MODE" is displayed.
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5 3/($6(48,77+,602'(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
YES
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and
density adjustment.
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the
printer color balance and density. printer color balance and density.
NO
Are the color balance and
density at the satisfactory
level?
YES
End
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
Low density High density
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
;
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17 /
/˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.
. & 0 < %
10-key $M
OK CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
,˖ ˖32,17 level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
-˖ ˖32,17 not be reversed.
.˖ ˖32,17
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
/˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17 The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
,˖ ˖32,17 SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
-˖ ˖32,17 density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is fied.
automatically selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register 10-F (2)
the color balance as the service target. Printer high density image density
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not reproduction setting (Supporting the high
required. density section tone gap)
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar- (No need to adjust normally)
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the
the next color balance adjustment.
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high
density section.
10-F Printer image quality adjustment This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
(Individual adjustment) cases, a change of setting must be made.
a. General * When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each * To lower the density in the high density section.
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the
a. Adjustment procedure
basic adjustments ADJ 10E (1) and ADJ 10E (2) or there is a
request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this 1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode.
adjustment.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$˖ ˖&0< (1$%/(',6$%/(
)˖ ˖%/$&.0$;7$5*(7
(No need to adjust normally)
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the printer mode.
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 2.
)˖ ˖%/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
2.
Setting
OK Display/Item Content
range
Default
If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed, density of 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
the high density part is changed. A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the printer The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic adjustment)
8) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on
10-F (3) the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
Printer gamma adjustment for each dither left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
(Automatic adjustment) (No need to adjust patch image (adjustment pattern).
normally)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density PRINTER CALIBRATION
in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, and the gloss
paper mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
b. Adjustment procedures
1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
PRINTER CALIBRATION
9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
check.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚˹
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment is executed automatically.
To execute the copy color balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.
2.
ADJ 11 Paper size sensor adjustment
2.
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(;(&87,1*
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
(;(&87(
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3 $ 326,7,21$'-8670(17
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
(;(&87(
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
EXECUTE paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
Repeat the above procedure to adjust displayed.
the A4R width MIN POSITION. When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'
(;(&87(
2) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
6(7$1$6,=( h &23<3$3(5217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
$1':,7+7+(2&23(1'7851217+((;(&87(.(<
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
(;(&87( frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
Adjustment
Adjustment completed EXECUTE * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
failed
as a needle or a pin).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(1625/(9(/,6$'-867('
ADJ 14 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
(;(&87(
paper rear edge section.
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws on the two posi-
tions in the front/rear frame direction.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
3+2726(1625(5525326,7,21
3'3'3'3'3'3'3'
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
(;(&87(
$˖ ˖%.0$*
15-B Print image print area adjustment
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
* When a paper tray is replaced.
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8 * When the paper tray section is disassembled.
,˖ ˖68%0)7
$˖ ˖%.0$* Before execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute the print
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 image magnification ratio adjustment (ADJ 15A) (main scanning
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
direction) (print engine) (manual adjustment).
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ $˖ ˖55&$
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
*˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖68%0)7
,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
-˖ ˖'(1%
2.
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
$˖ ˖55&$
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
*˖ ˖/($'
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6 +˖ ˖6,'(
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
2.
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an
adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items B -
6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with
N and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "O" to
the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.
select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing
test printing. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. range value
The adjustment pattern is printed. Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40
adjustment adjustment
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
are in the range of the standard values.
adjustment
FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
Content Standard adjustment value
REAR area adjustment
X Lead edge void area 4.0 r 1.0mm
Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
scanning correction value
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 r 2.0mm direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
Z1 correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
2.0 2.0mm value value
DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
X
DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
4.0 1.0mm Y correction value
2.0 - 5.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
Z2
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
2.0 2.0mm
follows:
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
$˖ ˖%.0$*
The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all $˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
paper feed tray. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to '˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray. )˖ ˖0$,1&6
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
check that the void area is within the specified range.
,˖ ˖68%0)7
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if -˖ ˖68%&6
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range, .˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
change the adjustment value of item (RRCB-XXX) in SIM 50-1.
(;(&87( 2.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
15-C Print image off-center adjustment
(Print engine) (Manual adjustment) End of print
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. 7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
* When a paper tray is replaced. $˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
* When the paper tray section is disassembled. %˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
* When ADJ 3A Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment '˖ ˖0$,1&6
(Main scanning direction) is performed. (˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. *˖ ˖0$,1/&&
/˖ ˖68%/&&
* U2 trouble has occurred. (;(&87( 2.
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
RV
2.0mm 2.0mm
FV
2.0mm 2.0mm
(Example 2)
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than
the original)
2.
)˖ ˖63)% 68%
2.
10
fication ratio is changed by 0.1%.
50
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
100
10
obtained.
150 original
50
adjustment
copy
150
(Manual adjustment)
200
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust-
formula: ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
(%) ment.
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis-
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
4).
(100 r 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
17-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual
cedures.
adjustment) (Document table mode)
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
%˖ ˖&&' 68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1 * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
'˖ ˖63) 68%
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(˖ ˖63)% 0$,1
)˖ ˖63)% 68% 1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the
adjustment mode (document table).
2. A
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value A=B
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
B
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
2) Check the copy image center position.
adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50 If A - B = r 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
A'
adjustment (Main scan)
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan) A' - B' = 1.0mm
b
2.
$˖ ˖6,'(
been properly adjusted. $˖
%˖ ˖6,'(
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
Front surface Back surface
2.
SIM50-12
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
Draw a line at the center of the center adjustment
front surface and the back surface
of paper in parallel with the paper A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
transport direction. position is shifted to the rear frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖'(1%
.˖ ˖)52175($5
100%
5mm
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
2.
Image area
L T
L T
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 63)
0.1mm. $˖
$˖ ˖6,'(
%˖ ˖6,'(
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'(
2.
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan Paper rear edge
timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.
(Lead edge image loss adjustment)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE Copy image
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to
the following values.
(Standard set value)
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface) Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
procedure.
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
'˖ ˖67$3/()5217
(˖ ˖67$3/(%27+
)˖ ˖67$3/(3,7&+
*˖ ˖381&+&(17(5
+˖ ˖381&++2/(
2.
Copy image
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment adjust the paper alignment alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
(F side alignment width when the paper stop position position is shifted to the R side.
plate stop position) alignment is improper. (F/R When the adjustment value is
(Paper alignment Alignment is determined by direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
adjustment) the combination of the both position is shifted to the F side.
adjustment values of FRONT
ADJUST and REAR
ADJUST.
B REAR Alignment position 2 - 18 10 When changing the R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment adjustment values of FRONT alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
(R side alignment ADJUST and REAR ADJUST stop position position is shifted to the F side.
plate stop position) from the default values, be (F/R When the adjustment value is
(Paper alignment sure to change them by the direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
adjustment) same variation. position is shifted to the R side.
C STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
REAR adjustment (one the R side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position at the the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
rear) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
D STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
FRONT adjustment (one the F side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position in front) the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
E STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple off-center is Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
BOTH adjustment (center shifted, perform the position increased, the staple position is
position of two adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
positions binding) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
F STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When it is required to change Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
PITCH adjustment (staple the staple interval, perform position increased, the staple interval is
pitch of two the adjustment. (Stapler stop increased.
positions binding) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple interval is
direction) decreased.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 - 63 50 When the punch off-center is Punch When the adjustment value is 0.1441mm
CENTER positioning sensor shifted, perform the position decreased, the punch position is
adjustment. (F/R shifted to the front side.
direction) When the adjustment value is
increased, the punch position is
shifted to the rear side.
H PUNCH Punch hole 42 - 58 50 When the punch hole position Punch When the adjustment value is 0.2584mm
HOLE adjustment (paper is shifted in the transport position increased, the punch position is
transport direction) direction, perform the (Paper shifted to the paper lead edge side.
adjustment. transport When the adjustment value is
direction) decreased, the punch position is
shifted to the paper rear edge side.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 1
START (Copy mode)
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 2
3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section RSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC). Desk
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
6 Used to perform fusing pressure release and applying, and to check the operations of the control Fusing
circuits.
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for
each color).
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles.
(When the number of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version,
and the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the RSPF
number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
22 18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 3
Main Sub Functions Section
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed.
(If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner supply quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
5 Used to display the toner density correction data. (Not used in the market.) Process
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right paper exit tray. Paper exit
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale)
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
(For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation. Fusing
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly.
There are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center
binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
51 Used to set the specifications of the serial port operation. (For PCI)
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment
retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
18 Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 4
Main Sub Functions Section
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and
the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
33 2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of Felica card.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4.
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning. Fusing
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photoconductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum, development)/
Fusing/LSU
15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
62 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy
mode documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 5
Main Sub Functions Section
46 43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(After execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset to the initial value.)
54 Used to perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither).
58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution. (Smoothing process)
59 Used to perform the copy mode pseudo resolution image process adjustment.
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process,
and the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
65 Used to set the color correction table.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) RSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction)
(Auto adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21 and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF resist
roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on
the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
9 RSPF dirt detection setting
10 RSPF dirt detection execution
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to import the SIM23-2 data into a USB memory in the TEXT format.
7 Used to import SYSLOG data into a USB memory
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
62 1 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
(SD Card: User data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and
the system area) (SD Card: User data)
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 6
Main Sub Functions Section
62 12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to delete the document filing management data. HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
6 Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print .(Self print).
(The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the FAX
result.
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. (If there is no FAX
confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset FAX
setting is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
24 Used to clear the FAST save data. FAX
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the
meta data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
34 Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to FAX
execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line FAX
or the command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 7
Main Sub Functions Section
67 26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density Printer
section tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
41 Used to set the threshold value for the printing judgement in the black color of the black and white Printer
printing or the selected color.
42 Used to change the gradation by increasing or decreasing the amount of the black color in the black and Printer
white printing or the selected color.
43 Used to adjust the color balance of the black and white printing finely. Printer
45 Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping. Printer
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
54 Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither (The adjustment is disable in a Printer
GDI printer.))
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 8
4. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1
Purpose Operation test/check
1-1
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner cuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section RSPF
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
scan resolution (operation speed). ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
ation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s) [RSPF]
400DPI 400DPI
(259.5mm/s) Item/Display Operation mode Default value
600DPI 600DPI (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(173.0mm/s) (259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI 400DPI 400DPI
(86.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
1-2 (259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
Purpose Operation test/check (259.5mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner 600DPI 600DPI
(reading) section and the related circuits. (173.0 mm/s)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 9
2-3 Display Content
FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor
Purpose Operation test/check FPLD1 Paper height detector 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FPLD2 Paper height detector 2
in the automatic document feeder and the FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor
control circuit. FPMS Punch mode sensor
Section RSPF FPPD1 Paper entry detector
FPTS Punch timing sensor
Operation/Procedure
FSED Staple empty detector
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel FSHPS Staple HP sensor
key. FSLD Staple lead edge detector
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FSSHPS Stapler shift home position sensor
The selected load performs the operation. FSSS Staple safety sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. FSSW Safety switch
FSTPD Staple tray paper detector
Display Content FTPS Tray position sensor
SPUM_F RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation)
SPUM_R RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)
SPFM_F RSPF transport motor (normal rotation)
SPFM_R RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation) 3-3
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid (RSPF) Purpose Operation test/check
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
STMPS Stamp solenoid
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
3 key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3-2 The selected load performs the operation.
Purpose Operation test/check When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Inner finisher (MX-FN17)
sors and the detectors in the finisher and
the control circuit. Display Content
FCF Cooling fan
Section Finisher FDRLM Paper exit roller lift motor
Operation/Procedure FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R
played. FPAS Paper alignment solenoid
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active FPDM Paper exit motor
are highlighted. FPGS Paper gate solenoid
FPLDS Paper height detector solenoid
Inner finisher (MX-FN17) FPM Punch motor
Display Content FPS Paddle solenoid
FABHS Paper alignment belt HP sensor FPSM Punch shift motor
FAPHPS_F Paper alignment plate HP sensor F FPTM Paper transport motor
FAPHPS_R Paper alignment plate HP sensor R FSM Staple motor
FDRPS Paper exit roller position sensor FSSM Stapler shift motor
FDTLLS Paper exit tray lower limit sensor FTLM Tray lift motor
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector
FDTULS Paper exit tray upper limit sensor 3-10
FFL Fan lock signal
Purpose Adjustment
FPCHPS Punch home position sensor
FPD Punch unit detection (connector) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
FPDFS Punch dust sensor Section Finisher
FPES1 Punch paper edge sensor 1 Operation/Procedure
FPES2 Punch paper edge sensor 2
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
FPES3 Punch paper edge sensor 3
panel.
FPES4 Punch paper edge sensor 4
FPES5 Punch paper edge sensor 5 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
FPES6 Punch paper edge sensor 6 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
FPES7 Punch paper edge sensor 7
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 10
Inner finisher (MX-FN17)
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment adjust the paper alignment alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
(F side alignment width when the paper stop position position is shifted to the R side.
plate stop position) alignment is improper. (F/R When the adjustment value is
(Paper alignment Alignment is determined by direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
adjustment) the combination of the both position is shifted to the F side.
adjustment values of FRONT
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST.
B REAR Alignment position 2 - 18 10 When changing the R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment adjustment values of FRONT alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
(R side alignment ADJUST and REAR ADJUST stop position position is shifted to the F side.
plate stop position) from the default values, be (F/R When the adjustment value is
(Paper alignment sure to change them by the direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
adjustment) same variation. position is shifted to the R side.
C STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
REAR adjustment (one the R side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position at the the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
rear) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
D STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
FRONT adjustment (one the F side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position in front) the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
E STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple off-center is Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
BOTH adjustment (center shifted, perform the position increased, the staple position is
position of two adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
positions binding) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
F STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When it is required to change Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
PITCH adjustment (staple the staple interval, perform position increased, the staple interval is
pitch of two the adjustment. (Stapler stop increased.
positions binding) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple interval is
direction) decreased.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 - 63 50 When the punch off-center is Punch When the adjustment value is 0.1441mm
CENTER positioning sensor shifted, perform the position decreased, the punch position is
adjustment. (F/R shifted to the front side.
direction) When the adjustment value is
increased, the punch position is
shifted to the rear side.
H PUNCH Punch hole 42 - 58 50 When the punch hole position Punch When the adjustment value is 0.2584mm
HOLE adjustment (paper is shifted in the transport position increased, the punch position is
transport direction) direction, perform the (Paper shifted to the paper lead edge side.
adjustment. transport When the adjustment value is
direction) decreased, the punch position is
shifted to the paper rear edge side.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 11
4-5
4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
4-2
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) .
Purpose Operation test/check
Section Desk
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
Operation/Procedure
sors and detectors in the desk, and the
control circuit of those. Check the ON operation
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
Section Desk
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
Operation/Procedure
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- highlighted.
played.
Check the OFF operation
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
are highlighted.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
Desk returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
Display Content display is maintained.
D1MDC Desk 1 installation detection connector
D1PPD Desk 1 paper transport detector Button Content
DTRC Desk transport clutch
D1ULD Desk 1 upper limit detector
D1PED Desk 1 paper empty detector
D1PQD Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detector
D1PRED1 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 1
D1PRED2 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 2
D1PRED3 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 3 5
D1PRED4 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 4
D2MDC Desk 2 installation detection connector 5-1
D2PPD Desk 2 paper transport detector
Purpose Operation test/check
D2ULD Desk 2 upper limit detector
D2PED Desk 2 paper empty detector Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
D2PQD Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detector LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
D2PRED1 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 1 cuit.
D2PRED2 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 2 Section Operation panel
D2PRED3 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 3 Operation/Procedure
D2PRED4 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 4
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX o
MIN o the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
4-3 The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk, and the control circuit of those.
5-2
Section Desk
Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
lamp and the control circuit.
touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Fusing
The selected load performs the operation. Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Desk 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Display Content The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
D1LM Tray 1 lift-up motor When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
D1PFC Tray 1 paper feed clutch
Heater lamp operation check method:
D2LM Tray 2 lift-up motor
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
D2PFC Tray 2 paper feed clutch
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the
DPFM Desk transport motor
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
frame fusing section.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 12
5-3 Section Item/Display Content
Purpose Operation test/check Transport/ ADUC1 ADU transport clutch 1
process PFM Transport motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
RRM Registration motor
lamp and the control circuit.
POMF (*1) Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
Section Scanner (reading) POMR (*1) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
Operation/Procedure FUM Fusing motor
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel CPFM Paper feed motor
key. OSM Offset motor
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec. TRC_DSK Desk clutch
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. TRC_LCC (*2) LCC clutch
TRC_FIN Finisher clutch
HPFC Transport roller clutch
5-4 PFC Vertical transport clutch
RRC Registration roller clutch
Purpose Operation test/check
Paper feed CLUM1 Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
charge lamp and the control circuit. CLUM2 Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Section Process CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Operation/Procedure CPUS1 Paper feed pickup solenoid
(Paper feed tray 1) (Not used)
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual paper feed)
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. *1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec. displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the
same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the
DL_K Discharge lamp K
operation is stopped.
DL_C Discharge lamp C *2: Displayed but not installed in some models.
DL_M Discharge lamp M
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
6-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
6 motor and its control circuit.
Section Others
6-1 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Operation test/check 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits. The selected load performs the operation.
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Operation/Procedure Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel Load operation check method:
key. The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
sound.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Display Content
Load operation check method: PROFM2 Process fan 2
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, POFM Paper exit cooling fan
(Drives POFM1 and POFM2 at the same time.)
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
FUFM Fusing cooling fan
sound.
PROFM1 Process fan 1
PSFM Power cooling fan
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 13
6-3
7
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the trans-
7-1
port unit and the control circuit.
Purpose Setting
Section Process (Transport)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
Operation/Procedure
aging.
1) Select the operation mode with the mode select button.
Section Others
Mode select button Content Operation/Procedure
TC1 Primary transfer (normal rotation) 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
TC1_R Primary transfer (reverse rotation)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TC2 Secondary transfer
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation of the mode The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
selected in 1) is performed. after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
6-90
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
enable position)
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 14
7-9 Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
Purpose Operation test/check
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode SPEED bias voltage r5V
(Used to check the copy operation and the DVB_K (Middle
image quality for each color). speed mode)
Section B MIDDLE Developing C 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
Operation/Procedure DVB_C (Middle
1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key. speed mode)
(Two or more colors can be selected.) C MIDDLE Developing M 0 - 600 –450V
The key of the selected color is highlighted. SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_M (Middle
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. speed mode)
Copying is performed with the selected color. D MIDDLE Developing Y 0 - 600 –450V
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper- SPEED bias voltage r5V
ation menu in the simulation mode. DVB_Y (Middle
speed mode)
K Setup/cancel of black LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
C Setup/cancel of cyan SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_K (Low speed
M Setup/cancel of magenta
mode)
Y Setup/cancel of yellow
B LOW Developing C 0 - 600 –430V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_C (Low speed
mode)
7-12 C LOW Developing M 0 - 600 –430V
Purpose Operation test/check SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_M (Low speed
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
mode)
setting (for aging operation)
D LOW Developing Y 0 - 600 –430V
Section RSPF SPEED bias voltage r5V
Operation/Procedure DVB_Y (Low speed
mode)
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
(Setting range:0 - 255)
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
8
8-1
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simulta-
neously.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 15
Operation/Procedure
8-2
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
the main charger grid voltage in each
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
printer mode and the control circuit.
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simulta- * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
neously. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Process (Charging)
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Adjustment
Item/Display (Mode) Content Actual voltage
range
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) K 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) C 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) M 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Y 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) K 150 - 850 –610Vr5V
B LOW SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) C 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
C LOW SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) M 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Y 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
Actual
Setting Default
Item/Display Content output
range value
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer bias Color K Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL adjustment value Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
K
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
C
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
M
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
Y
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
K
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 103 –40PA
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment value paper Back surface 51 - 255 90 –30PA
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 103 –40PA
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 90 –30PA
O TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 83 –25PA
P TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX paper 1 Back surface 51 - 255 76 –20PA
Q TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 69 –15PA
R TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 69 –15PA
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 51 - 255 83 –25PA
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
U TC2 OHP CL Color OHP 51 - 255 69 –15PA
V TC2 OHP BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
W TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color Envelope 51 - 255 69 –15PA
X TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
Y TC2 THIN CL Color Thin paper 51 - 255 103 –40PA
Z TC2 THIN BW Black/White 51 - 255 103 –40PA
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 16
Actual
Setting Default
Item/Display Content output
range value
value
AA TC2 GLOSSY CL Secondary transfer bias Color Gloss paper 51 - 255 83 –25PA
AB TC2 GLOSSY BW adjustment value Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
AC TC2 CLEANING Secondary transfer Cleaning process (negative pole) 51 - 255 59 –8PA
AD TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD cleaning bias adjustment Low speed print mode 0 - 255 26 0V
AE TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD value Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 26 0V
AF TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning bias (positive pole) 0 - 255 102 500V
AG PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current adjustment Color Low speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AH PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL value Middle speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AI PTC LOW SPEED BW Black/White Low speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AJ PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AK CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC voltage adjustment Color Low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AL CASE VOLT MID CL value Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AM CASE VOLT LOW BW Black/White Low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AN CASE VOLT MID BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
9 10
9-2 10-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
sors and detectors in the paper reverse supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
section (duplex section) and its control cir- related circuit.
cuit. Section Process (Developing)
Section Duplex Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
played. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
are highlighted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector This simulation must be executed without installing the toner car-
tridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges installed,
toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in
9-3 overtoner.
Purpose Operation test/check If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner cartridges
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making a few black
the paper reverse section (duplex section) background copy in the single color copy mode of the target color.
and its control circuit.
TNM_K Toner motor K
Section Duplex
TNM_C Toner motor C
Operation/Procedure TNM_M Toner motor M
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel TNM_Y Toner motor Y
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
13
Display Content
ADUC1 ADU transport clutch 1 (*) 13--
ADUM ADU motor Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
*: Not used, but the button is displayed. Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 17
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
14 B MAINTE- Mainte- 0: 200K
NANCE nance counter Default
COUNTER (Color) 1 – 300: 1K –
14-- (COLOR) 300K
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.) 999:
Free
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
Section 22
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
22-1
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode.
16 (Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Section
16-- Operation/Procedure
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Item Display Content
Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Total TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
Operation/Procedure output (BW) quantity of black jams
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. quantity and white
TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
(COL) quantity of color jams
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity Effective paper
quantity of black and white (including self print,
excluding jams)
17 TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity Effective paper
of full color (including self print,
excluding jams)
17-- TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) (2COL) of 2-color (including self print,
excluding jams)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
Section (3COL) of 3-color (including self print,
excluding jams)
Operation/Procedure
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (SGL_COL) of single color (including self print,
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. excluding jams)
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white Billing target
copy counter (excluding self print)
COPY (COL) Full color copy Billing target
counter (excluding self print)
21 COPY (2COL) 2-color copy Billing target
counter (excluding self print)
21-1 COPY Single color copy Billing target
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Purpose Setting Print PRINT (BW) Black and white Billing target
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle. print counter (excluding self print)
PRINT (COL) Full color print Billing target
Section
counter (excluding self print)
Operation/Procedure PRINT (2COL) 2-color print Billing target
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance counter (excluding self print)
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean- PRINT (3COL) 3-color print Billing target
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not counter (excluding self print)
clarify. PRINT Single color print Billing target
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white Billing target
panel.
filing document filing (excluding self print)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. print counter
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) DOC FIL Color document Billing target
(COL) filing print counter (excluding self print)
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value DOC FIL 2-color document Billing target
A MAINTE- Mainte- 0: 200K (2COL) filing print counter (excluding self print)
NANCE nance counter Default DOC FIL(SGL Single color Billing target
COUNTER (Total) 1 – 300: 1K – COL) document filing (excluding self print)
(TOTAL) 300K print counter
999: Other OTHER (BW) Black and white Self print quantity
Free other counter
OTHER (COL) Color other Self print quantity
counter
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 18
Item Display Content
S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December are
PCI PCI OPE- PCI counter PCI accumulated "X" and "Y" respectively.)
TIME operation time (H)
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
ICU (SUB) ICU (Sub section) (ARM9)
22-2 LANGUAGE Language support data version
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check PCL (MAIN) PCL (Main section)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed PCL (PROFILE) PCL (Color profile)
and troubles. (When the number of total PCU PCU
jam is considerably great, it is judged as SCU SCU
necessary for repair.) FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
Section DESK Desk unit
FINISHER Finisher
Operation/Procedure
NIC NIC
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed. POWER-CON Power controller
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
(except 20cpm machine)
RSPF JAM RSPF JAM counter
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
TROUBLE Trouble counter
ESCP ESCP font ROM
PDL PDL font ROM
PCI PCI
22-3
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the 22-6
misfeed count of each position. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
* Presumption of the faulty point by this
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data
data is possible.
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
Section firmware version, and the counter list.
Operation/Procedure Section
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one Operation/Procedure
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
22-4 1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Print list
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his- Item/Display Print content
mode
tory. A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version,
Section counter data, etc.
Operation/Procedure 2 SIM50-24 data
3 Data related to the process control
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
1).
22-5
Purpose Others 22-8
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
unit (section). Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
Section Firmware (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF,
Operation/Procedure and the scan (reading) unit.
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. Section
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to Operation/Procedure
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner
related counters are displayed.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 19
22-9 22-11
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
quantity) of each paper feed section. receive) of FAX.
Section Paper feed, ADU (Only when FAX is installed)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. Operation/Procedure
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
are displayed.
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)
TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2)
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3)
FAX SEND FAX send counter
TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4)
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
SEND TIME FAX send time
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
ADU ADU paper transport counter (Paper reverse section)
22-10 22-12
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions
(option, internal hardware). and the number of misfeed at each posi-
Section tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
siderably great, it can be judged as
Operation/Procedure
necessary for repair.)
The system configuration is displayed.
Section RSPF
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
played.) Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
MACHINE MX-2615N Main unit up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
MX-3115N
SPF STANDARD Reversing single pass feeder
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
DESK MX-DE12 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DE13 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DE14 Stand/3x500 sheet paper drawer
PUNCHER MX-PN11A Punch unit
MX-PN11B
MX-PN11C
MX-PN11D
FINISHER MX-FN17 Inner finisher
FAX1 MX-FX11 Facsimile expansion kit
PRINTER STANDARD Printer expansion kit (PCL)
PS MX-PK11 PS expansion kit
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR40U Data security kit (commercial version)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
SD *****MB SD Card capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE MX-PF10 Bar code font
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
ACM(*) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
EAM(*) MX-AMX3 External account module
PCI CONNECT PCI generating unit
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 20
22-13
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.
Number of
Number of
Item/Display Content Print counter RPM Life meter remaining
use days
days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING BELT Fusing belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release roller Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
SEPARATE PAWL Fusing separation pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
SEPARATE PLATE Fusing separation plate Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING WEB UNIT Fusing web unit Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter 0 - 65535 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer cleaning blade Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PTC PTC Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PS PAPER Paper dust cleaner Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (K) DV unit (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (C) DV unit (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (M) DV unit (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (Y) DV unit (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (K) OPC drum unit (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (C) OPC drum unit (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (M) OPC drum unit (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (Y) OPC drum unit (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (K) Main charger (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (C) Main charger (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (M) Main charger (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (Y) Main charger (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (K) OPC drum cleaning blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (C) OPC drum cleaning blade C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (M) OPC drum cleaning blade M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (Y) OPC drum cleaning blade Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TONER CTRG (K) Toner cartridge (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (C) Toner cartridge (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (M) Toner cartridge (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (Y) Toner cartridge (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
22-14
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 21
22-18
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.
Display item
Content
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation end)
22-19
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters
related to the scan - image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
Change the display with scroll key.
Item/Display Content
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
ORG_2CL counter (2-Color scan job)
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
ORG_SGL counter (Single-color scan job)
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
FAX OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send
SEND
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send
COUNTER
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL Trial mode counter
MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
HDD_B/W
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
HDD_CL (COLOR)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
HDD_2CL (2-COLOR)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
HDD_SGL (SINGLE color)
22-40
Purpose Error contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
contents.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 22
22-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 23
Detail display content of HISTORY1 Display Content
Display Content 66 AB series SRA3
NON Inch series No paper size 67 fixed form SRA3R
WLG fixed form Double Legal 68 SRA4
WLR Double Legal-R 69 SRA4R
LD Ledger 06A 318 x 469 mm
LDR Ledger-R (Double Letter) 06B 469 x 318 mm
LG Legal 06C 234 x 318 mm
LGR Legal-R 06D 318 x 234 mm
FC Foolscap 06E 312 x 440 mm
FCR Foolscap-R 06F 440 x 312 mm
LT Letter 70 220 x 312 mm
LTR Letter-R 71 312 x 220 mm
IV Invoice (Mini) 82 Domestic DBL Postcard
IVR Invoice-R (Mini) 83 special DBL Postcard-R
84 (Envelope) Postcard
EC Executive
ECR Executive-R 85 Postcard-R
A3W A3W (12x18 in) 87 119 x 277 mm
AWR A3W (12x18 in)-R 89 120 x 235 mm
12 22x17 08B 90 x 205 mm
13 22x17R 08D 90 x 185 mm
14 22x34 08F 240 x 332 mm
15 22x34R 91 216 x 277 mm
16 34x44 93 197 x 267 mm
17 34x44R 95 190 x 240 mm
18 44x68 97 162 x 229 mm
19 44x68R 99 142 x 205 mm
01A 9x12 09B 119 x 197 mm
01B 9x12R 09D 120 x 176 mm
01C 13x19 09F 114 x 162 mm
01D 13x19R 0A1 98 x 148 mm
MLG Mexican-Legal 0A3 105 x 235 mm
MLR Mexican-Legal-R 0A5 95 x 217 mm
ALG Asian-Legal 0A7 98 x 190 mm
ALR Asian -Legal-R 0A9 92 x 165 mm
EXT Other Extra (Special) 0AA AB series E-version
A1 AB series A1 0AB AB series L-version
A1R fixed form A1R 0AC AB series panorama size
A2 A2 0AD AB series name card size
A2R A2R 0AE AB series identification photo
A3 A3 0AF AB series name card small
A3R A3R 0B0 Other A3 width
A4 A4 0B1 B4 width
A4R A4R 0B2 A4 width
A5 A5 0B3 A3 width (Long size)
A5R A5R 0B4 B4 width (Long size)
A6 A6 0B5 A4 width (Long size)
A6R A6R 0BC Custom (Large size)
B3 B3 0BD Custom (Small size)
B3R B3R 0BF Custom
B4 B4 0C2 Oversea Monarch
B4R B4R 0C3 special Monarch-R
0C4 (Envelope) DL
B5 B5
B5R B5R 0C5 DL-R
B6 B6 0C6 C4
B6R B6R 0C7 C4-R
54 A0x2 0C8 C5
55 A0x2 R 0C9 C5-R
A0 A0 0CA C6
A0R A0R 0CB C6-R
B0 B0 0CC C65
B0R B0R 0CD C65-R
B1 B1 0CE ISOB5
B1R B1R 0CF ISOB5-R
B2R B2 0D0 Size6-1/2
B2R B2R 0D1 Size6-1/2-R
K8 K8 0D2 Size9
K8R K8R 0D3 Size9-R
K16 K16 0D8 Com-10
16R K16R 0D9 Com-10-R
K32 K32 0DA Inch series E-version
32R K32R 0DB Inch series L-version
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 24
Display Content 22-90
0DC Oversea Inch series panorama size
0DD special Inch series name card large
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
0DE (Envelope) Inch series identification photo Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
0DF Inch series name card small Section
0EC Other Extra (Special large size)
Operation/Procedure
0ED Extra (Special small size)
0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed)
1) Change the display with scroll key.
0F0 Long size 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
a coin vendor.)
All setting list (*) ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T)
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
Display Content PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
UST User type PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
LHP Letter head paper PS FONT LIST
PNP Perforated sheet PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)
RCL Recycled paper PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
COL Color paper NIC PAGE
PLN Standard paper Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
PRP Pre printed list (*) GROUP LIST
OHP OHP Transparency PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)
HV Heavy paper MEMORY BOX LIST
LBL Label sheet ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
ENV Envelope Document filing list (*) DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
HG Postcard System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
TAB Tab sheet ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
THN Thin paper ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
US1 User type 1 ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
US2 User type 2 ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
US3 User type 3 ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
US4 User type 4 ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
US5 User type 5 Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
US6 User type 6 number table
US7 User type 7 Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
HV2 Heavy paper 2 allow address
PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used) domain table
HV3 Heavy paper 3 To E-mail INBOUND ROUTING LIST
Transfer table list
HV4 Heavy paper 4
To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
GLS Glossy paper
Transfer list
Display content detail: Job mode (JOB) Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
Display Content
SHD Shading. * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
PCL Process control model, this setting is invalid.
SIM Test mode (Sim)
ICP Interruption copy
CP Copy
FXS
AXS
FAX send scan
AXIS
23
FXP FAX reception print
PR Printer 23-2
FXC FAX communication report print Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
00A Zaurus print
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
SLF Self/Test print
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
00C Document counter
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
RMT Remote maintenance
the judgment is made that repair is
00E SIM 52-01
required.)
00F Tandem (Cordless handset)
CFP Confidential print Section
NET Network scanner Operation/Procedure
PRF Proof print Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 25
23-80 24-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
and paper transport in the paper feed sec- ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
tion and the paper transport section. Used Section
to output the list of the operation status of
Operation/Procedure
the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport sec- 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
tion. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport 3) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure The target counter is cleared.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
paper transport is outputted.
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
in the paper feed and transport section. TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. ADU ADU paper feed counter
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 26
Item/Display Content
Item/Display Content
Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter)
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days)
ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
(Number of use days) Main charger (K)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Color) (Counter)
COL MAIN Main charger (C) (Counter)
Maintenance counter (Color)
CHARGER C Main charger (C) (Number of use days)
(Number of use days)
Fusing FUSING BELT Fusing belt (Counter) Main charger (C)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing belt (Number of use days)
MAIN Main charger (M) (Counter)
Fusing belt
CHARGER M Main charger (M) (Number of use days)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
FUSING Fusing roller (Counter) Main charger (M)
ROLLER (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing roller (Number of use days)
MAIN Main charger (Y) (Counter)
Fusing roller
CHARGER Y Main charger (Y) (Number of use days)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
PRESS Pressure roller (Counter) Main charger (Y)
ROLLER (Accumulated number of rotations)
Pressure roller (Number of use days)
Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
Pressure roller
K Drum blade K (Number of use days)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
FUSING LOAD Fusing Pressure release roller Drum blade K
(Accumulated number of rotations) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Separation SEPARATE Separation pawl (Counter) DRUM BLADE Drum blade C (Counter)
PAWL C Drum blade C (Number of use days)
Separation pawl (Number of use days)
Separation pawl Drum blade C
(Accumulated number of rotations) (Accumulated number of rotations)
SEPARATE Separation plate (Counter) DRUM BLADE Drum blade M (Counter)
PLATE M Drum blade M (Number of use days)
Separation plate (Number of use days)
Separation plate Drum blade M
(Accumulated number of rotations) (Accumulated number of rotations)
FUSING WEB Fusing web unit print counter DRUM BLADE Drum blade Y (Counter)
Y Drum blade Y (Number of use days)
Use day of fusing web unit
Fusing web cleaning send counter Drum blade Y
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Transfer TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter)
Other PS PAPER PS paper dust cleaner (Counter)
Primary transfer belt
(Number of use days) PS paper dust cleaner
(Number of use days)
Primary transfer belt
(Accumulated number of rotations) OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter) Ozone filter (Number of use days)
Transfer blade (Number of use days) * The winding counter for the fusing web cleaning is cleared by
Transfer blade being synchronized with the fusing web cleaning feed counter.
(Accumulated number of rotations)
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt (Counter)
Secondary transfer belt
(Number of use days) 24-5
Secondary transfer belt Purpose Data clear
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
PTC PTC counter (Counter)
replacement of developer, clear the
PTC counter (Number of use days)
counter.)
PTC counter
(Accumulated number of rotations) Section
Drum DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge (K) (Counter) Operation/Procedure
Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
days)
Drum cartridge (K)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(Accumulated number of rotations) 3) Press [YES] key.
DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge (C) (Counter) The target counter is cleared.
Drum cartridge (C)
(Number of use days)
Drum cartridge (C)
(Accumulated number of rotations) When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared automati-
DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge (M) (Counter) cally.
Drum cartridge (M)
(Number of use days) Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Drum cartridge (M) K Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (K)
(Accumulated number of rotations) Number of day that used developer (Day) K
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge (Y) (Counter) Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge (Y) C Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (C)
(Number of use days) Number of day that used developer (Day) C
Drum cartridge (Y) Developer cartridge print counter (M)
(Accumulated number of rotations) M Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (M)
Number of day that used developer (Day) M
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Y Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 27
24-15
Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
scan mode and the image send.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
The target counter is cleared.
Division Item/Display Content
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
Network NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read
COPY COL Copy counter (COLOR) scanner quantity counter (B/W scan job)
SINGLE COLOR Single color NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read
2COLOR 2-color quantity counter (COLOR scan job)
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (2-color scan job)
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read
24-9 quantity counter (single color scan
Purpose Data clear job)
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter Fax OUTPUT
and the self print mode print counter. INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending
Section SEND OUTPUT page
Operation/Procedure INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. SEND
3) Press [YES] key. E-mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
The target counter is cleared. FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W) USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
PRINT COL Print counter (COLOR) TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR
PRINT (2COL) Print counter (2-colors) scan job)
PRINT (3COL) Print counter (3-colors) SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
PRINT (SGL_COL) Print counter (Single color) SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W) (COLOR)
OTHER COL Other counter (COLOR) SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-
COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
(SINGLE color)
24-10
Purpose Data clear 24-35
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter. Purpose Data clear
(Only when FAX is installed) Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
Section data.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared. The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 28
Display Default
25 Division Item/Display
range value
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255 128
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255 128
25-1 medium speed process AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255 128
Purpose Operation test/check mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel- Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255 128
oping section. control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255 128
the low speed process AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255 128
Section Process (Developing section) mode AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255 128
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255 128
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255 128
process mode AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255 128
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- Display during execution of the simulation
played.
Item/Display Content
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K) TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C) TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M) TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y) TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K) TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K)
TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C) TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C)
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M) TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M)
TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y) TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y)
Error content
LOW Process speed: Low speed
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed Display Error name Error content
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or
the control voltage exceeds 207.
EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this simula- control voltage is less than 52.
tion. EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128±3.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge installed, toner
will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in over-
toner and a trouble.
25-4
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar-
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner ket.)
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
matic adjustment) Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.
Operation/Procedure
Display
1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel. Item/Display Content
range
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. YLD_CNT_FB Toner supply FB rate by the yield 50 - 200
count
The developing motor rotates for 1 min 30 sec, and the toner den-
DELTA_DVB Delta DVB (Process control DVB - -500 - 500
sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level
Target DVB)
is displayed.
IDL_DVB Target DBV 100 - 600
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner PROCON_DVB Process control DVB 100 - 600
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con- DV_LIFE Developer life area 1-8
trol level. COVERAGE_ Average print rate area 1 - 10
AREA
ENV_AREA Environment area 1-8
When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the reference MULTI_TIME Toner supply drive time area 1-8
toner concentration level is not set. Also when error code of EE-EC, (Specified by the DV motor rotation
time)
EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is
PRO_FB_CNT No. of remaining times of toner supply 0 - 65535
not set normally.
for the process control result
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is sup- PRO_FB_INT Interval of toner supply for the 0 - 65535
plied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may process control result
occur, causing a trouble. PRO_FB_RATIO Correction rate of one-time toner -10 -10
supply for the process control result
Display Default RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (+) 0 - 65535
Division Item/Display
range value CNT(+) (No. of times of compulsory toner
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 1 - 255 128 supply)
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 1 - 255 128 RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (-) (No. 0 - 65535
low speed process mode AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 1 - 255 128 CNT(-) of times of compulsory printing of
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 - 255 128 one-color background image)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 29
Default
Item/Display Content
value
25-5 OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
AUDITOR vendor is used.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density correction (Only the copy mode can
data. (Not used in the market.) be controlled.)
Section Process P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
signals for the intercard
Operation/Procedure connected to the PCU are
The toner density correction data are displayed. used for communication in
parallel I/F.
Item/Display Content Display P OTHER Mode for an external
range auditor connected to the
TCS OUTPUT Toner sensor output value 0 - 255 SCU.
DELTA_TSG Toner density sensor control voltage -255 - 255 VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
level correction value (*1)
TSG_REF Toner density sensor control voltage 0 - 255 VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
level reference value (MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode
TN_FALL_CNT_ Toner fall amount during a job (latest 0 - 255 S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
JOB average value) DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
TN_FALL_ Toner fall judgment threshold value 0 - 255 document filing print
JUDGE_CNT during a job OFF No support for the auditor in
TN_FALL_MODE_ No. of times of job interruption toner 0 - 255 document filing print
CNT supply operation mode PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
TN_FALL_CNT_ Latest average value of toner fall 0 - 255 performed in the duplex
INT amount in job interruption toner print mode.
supply operation If the remaining money
TN_FALL_CNT_ Latest average value of toner fall 0 - 255 expires during continuous
NEW amount when installing a new toner printing, the sheets in the
cartridge machine are discharged
TCS_ERR_MODE No. of times of TCS abnormality 0 - 65535 without being printed on the
_CNT(+) detection mode (+) (Undertoner) back surfaces.
TCS_ERR_MODE No. of times of TCS abnormality 0 - 65535 OFF Continuous printing is not
_CNT(-) detection mode (-) (Overtoner) performed in the duplex
print mode. (The remaining
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all
the printing process.)
If the remaining money
26 expires during printing, the
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back
26-1
surface.
Purpose Setting VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
right paper exit tray. MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_
Section Paper exit
TIMING timing of the paper lead OUT
Operation/Procedure edge by the sensor after the
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. paper passes the fusing
section is used as the
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
money charging timing.
This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit. FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
Item/Display Content edge by the sensor after the
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES paper passes the fusing
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO section is used as the
money charging timing.
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
26-3 edge by the paper exit
sensor of the right paper
Purpose Setting exit tray or of the after
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. process unit is used as the
(Setting must be made according to the money charging timing.
auditor use conditions.)
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
Section Auditor (*2) Details of the vendor mode
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Default
Item/Display Content
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 30
Details of the vendor mode
26-7
Completion Insufficient money during Completion
Purpose Setting
of the copy job of the
specified specified Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID.
BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
(no money (Money
(Money (No money
remaining) remaining) Section
remaining) remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 Operation/Procedure
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1 1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key.
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1 Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3 inputted.
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly.
Operation 1:
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds, Refer to the following list and enter characters.
which can be changed in the system setting. Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input-
Operation 2: ted.
Auto clear is not made. To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key
Operation 3: and enter the correct character.
The display is shifted to the initial screen. 2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1).
26-5 The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode
Purpose Setting function.
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula-
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
11x17 size) tion mode.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 31
Default 26-30
Setting Default
Item/Display Content value
range value Purpose Setting
(Taiwan)
F DEV(COL) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
LONG Developer counter sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
SIZE(S) (color) standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
G TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
ing heater lamp)
LONG Total counter (B/W)
SIZE(L) Section
H TOTAL Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 Operation/Procedure
(COL) LONG Total counter (Color) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
SIZE(L)
I MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 0 Control allowed
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
1 Control inhibited
SIZE(L) counter (B/W)
J MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 2) Press [OK] key.
(COL) LONG Maintenance
The set value in step 1) is saved.
SIZE(L) counter (Color)
K DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
LONG Developer counter to the power frequency, etc.
SIZE(L) (B/W)
L DEV(COL) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
LONG Developer counter CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
SIZE(L) (color) INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
Long Scale (Small) : 631 - 1050mm
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
Long Scale (Large) : 1631 - 1200mm
26-10
26-32
Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
scanner. Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing
cleaning operation.
Section
Operation/Procedure Section Fusing
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default) Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A CLEANIN User fusing cleaning 0 YES 0(YES)
G PRINT function is Enable.
26-18 SET User fusing cleaning 1 NO
function is Disable.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) 26-35
Section Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. trouble history when a same trouble
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display
3) Press [OK] key.
as several series of troubles.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Section
Default Operation/Procedure
Item Display Content
value 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
0
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed 0 Only once display.
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited. 1 Any time display.
0
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 32
26-38 26-50
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
maintenance life is reached. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. panel.
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
value value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0 A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance 1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue) B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode Refer
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/ Enable/Disable setting to *1/*2
Stop when the maintenance C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
life is over (Print Stop) FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1 limited. to *3
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end 1 Finisher special paper
1: STOP) (Print Continue) The number of paper exit is
1 Continue/Stop setting of print not limited.
when the fusing web is end D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer
(Print Stop) (PRINTER) counters are displayed. to *1
1 All are displayed except for
the 3-color print counter.
2 Monochrome and full color
26-41 print counters are displayed.
Purpose Setting E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
1 Paper feed tray color display
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS) OFF during paper feed
in the center binding mode. F LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Long size print enable
Section 1 Long size print disable
Operation/Procedure
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Destination Item A Item B Item D
0 AMS Disable USA 1 0 2
1 AMS Enable CANADA 1 0 2
2) Press [OK] key. INCH 1 0 2
JAPAN 1 7 2
The set value in step 1) is saved.
AB_B 1 0 2
<Default value of each destination> EUROPE 1 0 2
UK 0 0 2
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
AUS 1 0 2
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
AB_A 1 0 2
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
CHINA 1 0 2
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable) (*2) Item B: COLOR MODE set value (OFF: Displayed/ON: Not dis-
played)
Mode 2-Color/Single
26-49 Set value
Single 2-color Counter
Purpose Setting 0 OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF ON OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
2 ON OFF OFF
mode.
3 ON ON OFF
Section 4 OFF OFF ON
Operation/Procedure 5 OFF ON ON
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) 6 ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON
Item/Setting value Content Default value
LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 33
(*3)
26-52
Target Target paper setting Purpose Setting
paper 0 1 Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1," (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
or not.
discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of the paper exit Section
sheets are mixed and tray is full or Operation/Procedure
discharged and 10 or less when 250
sheets of a kind are sheets
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
continuously discharged, the (35.5mm thick)
operation is stopped by the are discharged. 0 Count up
paper exit tray full detection. 1 No count up
Label The operation is stopped when
2) Press [OK] key.
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, The set value in step 1) is saved.
OHP however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and Destination Default
discharged and 100 or less U.S.A 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are CANADA 0 (Counted)
continuously discharged, the INCH 0 (Counted)
operation is stopped by the JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
paper exit tray full detection.
AB_B 0 (Counted)
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
26-51 U.K. 0 (Counted)
Purpose Setting AUS. 1 (Not counted)
AB_A 0 (Counted)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the serial
CHINA 0 (Counted)
port operation. (For PCI)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 26-53
When the PCI is installed, setting is made to 1 or 2. Purpose Setting
2) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance
adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
Setting Default Section
Item/Display Content
range value
A PCI Serial port PCI mode OFF 0 0
Operation/Procedure
SETTING (oFor connecting the serial (Serial 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
port vendor) port PCI
Serial port PCI mode ON mode Setting Default
Item/Display Content
(JOB status LED: MODE1) OFF) range value
Serial port PCI mode ON A COPY Copy Allow 1 1
(JOB status LED: MODE2) (1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0
B PRINTER Printer Allow 1 1
MODE1: Red LED is light/blink/OFF, MODE2: Red LED always (1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0
OFF
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
When "PCI SETTING" is changed from "0" to "1" or "2," if SIM26-03
"OUTSIDE AUDITOR" is set to "S_VENDOR," "OUTSIDE AUDI-
TOR" is changed to "NONE." 26-65
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Use the touch key to set.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 34
26-69 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Setting E TONER END Setting of the 1-3 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for COUNT number of copy/
toner near end. print/FAX outputs
Enable after TONER
Section NEAR END.
Operation/Procedure F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status 0-1 1
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. ALERT send of E-mail
alert (When the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. toner
3) Press [OK] key. preparation
The set value in step 2 is saved. message is
displayed) (in
Setting Default near near toner
Item/Display Content end)
range value
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 List of 1 Low status
PREPARATION preparation Default send of E-mail
(0:YES 1:NO) message is values and alert (near toner
displayed. set values end)
1 The toner for each
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quan-
preparation destination
tity
message is not
displayed. Setting value Printable quantity at A4/5% equivalent conversion
B REMAINING 0.05 0 Toner 0-9 1 0
TONER preparation at 2 25
LEVEL remaining toner 3 50
level of 5%
0.1 1 Toner <List of Default values and set values for each destination>
preparation at
remaining toner Setting value
level of 10% Enable/
0.15 2 Toner Toner Toner Toner near Disable of
Destination
preparation at preparation preparation end print job
remaining toner message time message continuation
level of 15% at toner end
0.2 3 Toner U.S.A 0 4 (Displayed 0 2
preparation at (Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print
remaining toner toner operation
level of 20% remaining stopped)
0.25 4 Toner quantity is
preparation at 25%.)
remaining toner CANADA 0 4 (Displayed 0
level of 25% (Displayed) when the (Displayed)
0.3 5 Toner toner
preparation at remaining
remaining toner quantity is
level of 30% 25%.)
0.35 6 Toner INCH 0 4 (Displayed 0
preparation at (Displayed) when the (Displayed)
remaining toner toner
level of 35% remaining
quantity is
0.4 7 Toner
25%.)
preparation at
remaining toner JAPAN 0 4 (Displayed 1 (Not
level of 40% (Displayed) when the Displayed)
toner
0.45 8 Toner
remaining
preparation at
quantity is
remaining toner
25%.)
level of 45%
AB_B 0 4 (Displayed 0
0.5 9 Toner
(Displayed) when the (Displayed)
preparation at
toner
remaining toner
remaining
level of 50%
quantity is
C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near 0-1
25%.)
END (0:YES 1:NO) end message is
displayed.
1 The toner near
end message is
not displayed.
D TONER END 1 Operation setup 1-3
1
2 Operation setup
2
3 Operation setup
3
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 35
Setting value When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
Enable/ (shade delete quantity) is increased.
Toner Toner Toner near Disable of
Destination Setting
preparation preparation end print job Item/Display Content Default value
message time message continuation range
at toner end A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
EUROPE 0 4 (Displayed 0 2 SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print (M) (shade delete amount:
toner operation quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
remaining stopped) B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
quantity is SHADOW ADJ (S) loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
25%.) delete quantity) amount:
U.K. 0 4 (Displayed 0 adjustment 0.1mm/step)
(Displayed) when the (Displayed)
toner
remaining
quantity is 26-74
25%.)
Purpose Setting
AUS. 0 4 (Displayed 0
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
toner Section
remaining
quantity is
Operation/Procedure
25%.) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AB_A 0 4 (Displayed 0 2) Press [OK] key.
(Displayed) when the (Displayed)
toner Setting Default
remaining Item/Display Content
range value
quantity is A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
25%.) (0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
CHINA 0 4 (Displayed 0 1 1 OSA trial mode is
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print canceled.
toner operation
remaining continued)
quantity is
25%.)
26-78
(Contents of set items) Purpose Setting
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display. Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation operation panel.
message is displayed.
Section
C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
Operation/Procedure
when the toner near end status is reached.
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
D: Machine operation at toner end
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end
message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 50 sheets) In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%. 2) Press [SET] key.
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
size and the print ratio.)
26-79
Purpose Setting
When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, printing can be Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
made after toner near end. However, improper phenomena such as of user data delete result.
insufficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may result
Section
depending on the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" print-
ing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, toner end display Operation/Procedure
is made in the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
are disabled. The value for the display operation specification after comple-
tion of user data delete is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
26-73
Default
Purpose Setting Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan- pop-up display ON
tity) adjustment User data delete result NO 0
pop-up display OFF
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 36
27-2
27
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
27-1
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
Purpose Setting ber. (FSS function)
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica- Section
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Operation/Procedure [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [SET] key.
0 Not detection
1 Detection The set value in step 2) is saved.
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience
stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience
stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 37
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(C) NEAR_END timing setting (C) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(M) NEAR_END timing setting (M) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END timing setting (Y) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
27-5 27-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
tion allows the host computer to check the (FSS function)
machine tag No.) (FSS function) Section
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
0 Allow (Default)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
1 Inhibit
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 2) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [SET] key. The set value in step 1) is saved.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 38
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
27-7
retry is actually not registered.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.
(FSS function) 27-10
Section Purpose Data clear
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. information. (FSS function)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
3) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 2) is saved. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
range value
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO)
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1 Target history Serial communication retry history
B ALERT Alert call enable (*1) 0 0 (YES) High density process control error history
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1 Halftone process control error history
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX) Automatic registration adjustment error history
(0: FAX Not used. 1 Scanner gain adjustment retry history
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2 Paper transport time between sensors
2: HTTP)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 39
27-12
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
process control and the automatic registra-
tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
tion)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
tration adjustment error history is displayed.
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 40
Code between Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
RSPF FEED TIME1 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 1 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 2 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME3 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 3 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME4 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 4 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME5 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 5 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME6 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 6 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME7 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 7 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME8 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 8 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME9 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 9 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME10 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 10 hour: min.: sec.
27-16
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 41
27-17
30
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
30-1
Section
Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
1) Select an item to be set. sors and the detectors in other than the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. paper feed section and the control circuits.
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification Section
is set.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [SET] key.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Item/ Setting Default
played.
Content NOTE
Display range value The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
PAPER Setting of paper kind 0-2 0 0: Standard lighted.
TYPE for paper order alert paper and
SET recycled paper PPD1 Paper transport detector 1
1: Standard PPD2 Paper transport detector 2
paper only POD1 Paper exit detector 1
2: Recycled POD2 Paper exit detector 2
paper only POD3 Paper exit detector 3
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector (Face-down tray)
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector (Right paper exit tray)
sheets] (A3) SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of DSW_R ADU open/close detector
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
DSW_C Transport cover open/close detector (Paper feed tray 1)
sheets] (A4)
DSW_F Front cover open/close detector
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
DHPD_CL OPC drum rotation sensor (CL)
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B4) DHPD_K OPC drum rotation sensor (BK)
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of TNFD Waste toner full detector
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box HLPCD Fusing roller pressure detector
sheets] (B5) DSW_C2 Transport cover open/close detector (Paper feed tray 2)
A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector (Right paper exit tray)
FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the 1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL)
(Number of used first time 1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK)
sheets) 2TUD Secondary transfer position detector
A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert WEBEND Web end detector (36cpm machine)
FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
sheets)
B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
30-2
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time Purpose Operation test/check
sheets) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert sors and the detectors in the paper feed
FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
section and the control circuits.
(Number of used first time
sheets) Section
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
27-18
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
Purpose Data clear lighted.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry
counter. CPFD1 Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 1)
CLUD1 Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
Section
CPED1 Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
Operation/Procedure CSPD1 Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
1) Select an item to be cleared. CSS11 Paper feed tray size detector (Paper feed tray 1)(*1)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. CSS12
3) Press [YES] key. CSS13
CSS14
The target counter is cleared.
CPFD2 Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 2)
Item/Display Content CLUD2 Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed retry counter CPED2 Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed retry counter CSPD2 Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed retry counter CSS21 Paper feed tray paper size detector (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed retry counter CSS22
MFT Manual paper feed retry counter CSS23
CSS24
CSS1 Paper feed tray 1 detector
CSS2 Paper feed tray 2 detector (*1)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 42
CSS2SET Desk installation detection
Default
MPLD Paper length detector (Manual paper feed tray) Item/Display Content
value
MPED Paper empty sensor (Manual paper feed tray) A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
*1: Displayed, but not installed in some models. B P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
C P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
33
41
33-2
Purpose Data clear 41-1
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of Purpose Operation test/check
Felica card. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
Section ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key. The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
The ID (IDM) information of Felica card is deleted. played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment. 41-2
Section Paper feed Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). detection level.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. Operation/Procedure
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. place a document on the document table.
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. The sensor level without document is recognized.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). 2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
41-3
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width ment size sensor and the control circuit.
P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
Section
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
Operation/Procedure
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
40-7
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Item/Display Content Detection level range
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
Section Paper feed PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
Operation/Procedure PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 43
43
43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B. .
2) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
3) Select an item to be set with displayed value.
The set value in step 3) is saved.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 44
Default value (SW-A) Default value (SW-B)
Setting
Item/Display Content Group Group Group Group Group Group
range
A B C A B C
AS JOBEND_FUMON_TIME Fusing motor after rotation time after completion of 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
a job (Excluding heavy paper, OPH, and envelopes)
AT HL_UM_JOB_SET_TMP_B Job enable temperature (B/W) when the upper roller 70 - 230 145 170 170 160 175 175
W temperature is lower than alpha qC
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – – –
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B CHINA
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 45
43-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 46
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – – –
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B CHINA
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-2.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – – –
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B CHINA
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 47
43-20
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
Operation/Procedure
99)
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 48
43-21
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
The set value in step 2 is saved.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 49
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
43-22
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0
The set value in step 2 is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM Black-White plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM Black-White plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
C HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_US Black-White plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black-White plain paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM Color plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM Color plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
G HL_US PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_US Color plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 50
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
K HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_US set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM set value in Color heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM set value in Color heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
O HL_US HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_US set value in Color heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 50
* Items PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL/ PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL: 1 Count = 1s Change
Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1qC change
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 50
43-23
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0
3) Press [OK] key. Input value 1 25 45 50
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
C HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black-White plain paper duplex under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
G HL_US PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_US Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color plain paper duplex under HH environment 1 - 99 50
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
K HL_US HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black-White heavy paper duplex under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
O HL_US HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color heavy paper duplex under HH environment 1 - 99 50
* Items PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH/ PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH: 1 Count = 1s Change
Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1qC change
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 51
43-24
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-2 and 43-
4.
Section
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
Operation/Procedure
99)
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Item/Display Content
Group A Group B Group C
A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction value for SIM43-4-A, E at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
B NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for SIM43-4-B, F at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
C LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction value for SIM43-22-A, E at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
D LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for SIM43-22-B, F at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
E HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction value for SIM43-23-A, E at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for SIM43-23-B, F at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
G NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under NN environment 5 5 5
H LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under LL environment 10 10 10
I HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under HH environment 5 5 5
J COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time heavy paper 5 5 5
K COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time OHP 10 10 10
L COOL_DOWN_ENVELOPE Cool down time envelope 15 15 15
M FUSER MOTOR Web send quantity 10 10 10
N NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_US Correction value for SIM43-4-C, G at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
O LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_US Correction value for SIM43-22-C, G at 120qC or below in L/L Warm-Up 50 50 50
P HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_US Correction value for SIM43-23-C, G at 120qC or below in H/H Warm-Up 50 50 50
Q HL_UM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_UM 135 135 135
R HL_LM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_LM 105 105 105
S HL_US THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_US 135 135 135
T HL_UM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_UM 135 135 135
U HL_LM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_LM 105 105 105
V HL_US THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_US 135 135 135
W HL_UM THIN PAPER READY Thin paper Ready-TH_UM 140 140 140
X HL_UM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_UM 150 155 160
Y HL_LM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_LM 110 110 110
Z HL_US REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_US 140 155 165
AA HL_UM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_UM 150 155 160
AB HL_LM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_LM 110 110 110
AC HL_US REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_US 140 155 165
AD HL_UM REC PAPER READY Recycled paper Ready-TH_UM 160 165 170
* Each temperature correction value: 1 count for 1qC change in temperature control
* Each paper exit count: 1 count = 1 sheet change
* Each cool down time: 1 count = 1sec change
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 52
43-31
44
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
44-1
web cleaning.
Purpose Setting
Section Fusing
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
Operation/Procedure
tion in the image forming (process) section.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
Cleaning the fusing web is performed.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
2) When cleaning the fusing web is completed, "COMPLETE" is
Operation/Procedure
displayed.
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
The set value may be changed for a design change or an individual
arrangement. Except for the above cases, however, the set value
must not be changed. If it is changed, a trouble may be occur.
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
Fusing web unit required.
installation Operation Remarks
detection state Item/ Setting Default
Content NOTE
Fusing web unit not Does not operate * During this operation, the Display range value
installed fusing web cleaning feed HV Normal operation high Normal Enable
Fusing web unit Operates for the counter is counted up. density process control (Disable:
installed specified time. Enable/Disable setting 1: NO)
HT Normal operation Reverse Enable
halftone process control (Enable:
Enable/Disable setting 0: YES)
43-32 TC Transfer output Enable
correction Enable/
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Disable setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the MD VG Membrane decrease Enable
forcible operation of web cleaning when job grid voltage correction
end. (36cpm machine) Enable/Disable setting
MD LD Membrane laser power Disable
Section Fusing
voltage correction
Operation/Procedure Enable/Disable setting
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. MD EV Membrane decrease Enable
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. environment grid
voltage correction
3) Press [OK] key. Enable/Disable setting
The set value in step 2) is saved. MD DL Membrane decrease Enable
discharge light quantity
correction Enable/
Disable setting
The set value may be changed for a design change or an individual MD DL EV Membrane decrease Disable
arrangement. Except for the above cases, however, the set value environment discharge
must not be changed. If it is changed, a trouble may be occur. light quantity correction
Enable/Disable setting
Setting Default TN_PIX_ Setting of Enable/ Enable
Item/Display Item
range value SUP Disable of toner supply
A JOB END Fusing web motor Enable 0-1 0 1 control for the yield
COMP ACT forcible operation Disable 1 count
CHECK condition when job end TN_FB Setting of Enable/ Enable
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity of 1 - 200 100 Disable of the toner
COMP ACT compulsory action of the fusing density correction for
INTERVAL web motor at job end the process control
C JOB END Number of forcible operations of 1-5 1 result
COMP ACT the fusing web motor when job TN_INT Setting of Enable/ Enable
CNT end Disable of toner
compulsory supply
correction for the
development traveling
distance
TN_RECV Setting of Enable/ Enable
Disable of the toner
density recovery
operation
TN_ADJ Setting of Enable/ Enable
Disable of the toner
sensor control voltage
adjustment in the
process control
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 53
Item/ Setting Default Classifi- Setting Default
Content NOTE Item/Display Content
Display range value cation range value
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/ Normal Enable PROCON G PCS_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
Disable of the toner (Disable: GRND substrate detection
falling distance 1: NO) level when the item
detection control Reverse B adjustment is
TN_EMP_ Setting of Enable/ (Enable: Enable completed
INT Disable of the toner 0: YES) H PCS_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
falling distance BELT MAX substrate input
detection control of job max. value F
interruption I PCS_F Transfer belt 1 - 255 0
TN_EMP_ Setting of Enable/ Enable BELT MIN substrate input
NEW Disable of the new min. value F
toner cartridge falling J PCS_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
distance detection BELT DIF substrate input
control difference F (Item
TN_PIX_ Setting of Enable/ Enable H - Item I)
TBL Disable of execution of K PCS_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
revision of the yield GRND substrate detection
count conversion table level when the item
for the toner supply C adjustment is
control in the halftone completed
process control L PCS_R Transfer belt 1 - 255 0
AR_AUTO Auto registration Enable BELT MAX substrate input
adjustment Enable/ max. value R
Disable setting M PCS_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
AR_ERROR Auto registration Enable BELT MIN substrate input
adjustment execution min. value R
error check Enable/ N PCS_R Transfer belt 0 - 256 0
Disable setting BELT DIF substrate input
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable difference R (Item
Enable/Disable setting L - Item M)
PRT_HT Halftone process Enable REGIST O REG_F Registration sensor 0 - 255 56
control printer LED ADJ light emitting
correction feedback quantity
Enable/Disable setting adjustment value F
PTC_ENV PTC environment Enable Enable: P REG_F Registration sensor 0 - 255 0
correction Enable/ Correc- DARK dark voltage F
Disable setting tion ON Q REG_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
GRND substrate detection
level when the item
B adjustment is
44-2 completed
Purpose Adjustment/Setup R REG_R Registration sensor 0 - 255 56
LED ADJ light emitting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image quantity
density sensor (registration sensor). adjustment value R
Section Process S REG_R Registration sensor 0 - 255 0
DARK dark voltage R
Operation/Procedure
T REG_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- GRND substrate detection
matically. level when the item
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- R adjustment is
played. completed
U REG_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
BELT MAX substrate detection
level max. value (F
Classifi- Setting Default
Item/Display Content side)
cation range value
V REG_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
PROCON A PCS_F_C Color image sensor 1 - 255 500
BELT MIN substrate detection
L_KA light emitting
level min. value (F
quantity
side)
adjustment value
W REG_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
B PCS_F Image sensor light 1 - 255 21
BELT DIF substrate detection
LED ADJ emitting quantity
level difference
adjustment value F
(Item U - Item V)
C PCS_R Image sensor light 0 - 255 21
X REG_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
LED ADJ emitting quantity
BELT MAX substrate detection
adjustment value R
level max. value (R
D PCS_F_C Dark voltage of 0 - 255 0 side)
L_DARK color image sensor
Y REG_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
E PCS_F Dark voltage of 0 - 255 0 BELT MIN substrate detection
DARK image sensor F level min. value (R
F PCS_R Dark voltage of 0 - 255 0 side)
DARK image sensor R
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 54
Classifi- Setting Default Error name Error content
Item/Display Content
cation range value Registration REG_R GRND error
REGIST Z REG_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0 substrate R scan The difference between the max. value and the
BELT DIF substrate detection abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
level difference greater than the specified value when the transfer
belt rotates 2 turn
(Item X - Item Y)
AA REG_F Toner patch 0 - 255 0
PATCH (K) detection level R
(K) in the
registration
44-4
adjustment Purpose Setting
AB REG_F Toner patch 0 - 255 0 Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
PATCH (C) detection level R
sity process control operation.
(C) in the
registration Section Process
adjustment Operation/Procedure
AC REG_F Toner patch 0 - 255 0
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
PATCH detection level R
(M) (M) in the 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
registration 3) Press [OK] key.
adjustment
AD REG_F Toner patch 0 - 255 0
PATCH (Y) detection level R
(Y) in the Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
registration required.
adjustment
AE REG_R Toner patch 0 - 255 0 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
PATCH (K) detection level R range value
(K) in the A PCS_CL TARGET Color image sensor 1 - 255 204
registration adjustment target value
adjustment B PCS_K TARGET Black image sensor 1 - 255 204
AF REG_R Toner patch 0 - 255 0 adjustment target value
PATCH (C) detection level R C LED_CL OUTPUT Color image sensor light 1 - 255 21
(C) in the emitting start level
registration D LED_K OUTPUT Black image sensor light 1 - 255 21
adjustment emitting start level
AG REG_R Toner patch 0 - 255 0 E PCS ADJSTMENT Color image sensor 1 - 255 4
PATCH detection level R LIMIT adjustment error
(M) (M) in the allowance level
registration F BELT GROUND Transfer belt one-turn 1 - 255 1
adjustment DIF substrate detection level
AH REG_R Toner patch 0 - 255 0 difference allowance
PATCH detection level R level
(Y) (Y) in G BIAS_CL Developing bias (for 0 - 255 60
theregistration STANDARD DIF color) reference
adjustment correction voltage
H BIAS_BK Developing bias (for 0 - 255 0
Error name Error content STANDARD DIF black) reference
F sensor adjustment PCS_F LED ADJ error correction voltage
abnormality The target is not reached by 4 times of adjust- I BIAS PATCH Toner patch making 1 - 255 60
ments. INTERVAL developing bias interval
R sensor adjustment PCS_R LED ADJ error J Y_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 40
abnormality The target is not reached by 4 times of density level (yellow)
adjustments. K M_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
Color sensor PCS_F_CL_KA ADJ error density level (magenta)
adjustment The target is not reached L C_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
abnormality density level (cyan)
Substrate scan PCS_F GRND error M K_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
abnormality F The difference between the max. value and the density level (black)
min. value of the substrate detection level is
N HV BK_GROUND Black image sensor 1 - 255 60
greater than the specified value when the transfer
LIMIT adjustment error
belt rotates 2 turn
allowance level
Substrate scan PCS_R GRND error
abnormality R The difference between the max. value and the
min. value of the substrate detection level is
greater than the specified value when the transfer
belt rotates 2 turn
Registration sensor REG_F LED ADJ error
F adjustment The target is not reached by 4 times of adjust-
abnormality ments
Registration sensor REG_R LED ADJ error
R adjustment The target is not reached by 4 times of adjust-
abnormality ments
Registration REG_F GRND error
substrate F scan The difference between the max. value and the
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
greater than the specified value when the transfer
belt rotates 2 turn
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 55
44-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
control forcibly.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Refer to the table below.)
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/PRN P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 630
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Medium speed print mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
(MIDDLE)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Low speed print mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 600
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 400
(LOW)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity area 1-8 4
TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer correction temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer correction temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer correction humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease correction humidity area 1-8 4
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP level 0-4 0
MD C STEP (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling distance area 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 56
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER LIFE MD K REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** MC grid correction voltage level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M ***
EV MD K REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** MC grid voltage correction level (for the 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** environment) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(EV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(EV) : L *** M ***
ALL MD K REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** MC grid voltage correction level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(ALL) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(ALL) : L *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Laser power correction level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Discharge lamp correction level (%) (for the drum 0 - 100 70
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** membrane decrease)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Discharge lamp correction level (%) (for the -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** environment)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
CRUM DESTINATION CRUM destination (Main unit data) - -
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination (CRUM data) - -
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
PROCON COUNT HT Halftone process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 57
44-14
Purpose Operation data display 44-21
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
perature and humidity sensor.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ get.
LSU
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed. Press [EXECUTE] key.
The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
Item/Display Content Display range are displayed.
TH_UM Fusing main thermistor Temperature:
differential input level (qC) / 0 - 255qC (r1qC) Display Content
(AD value) AD value: 0-1023 COMPLETE Normal complete
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing thermistor detection Temperature: ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor
level for compensation (qC) 0.0-255.0qC (r0.2qC) ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
/ (AD value) AD value: 0-1023 ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing thermistor detection AD value: 0-1023 ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
level (AD value) [YMCK] High density process control error
TH_LM Fusing thermistor A/D value Temperature: [YMCK]
(temperature qC) (Fusing 0 - 255qC (r1qC) OTHER Other errors
roller B edge) AD value: 0-1023
TH_US Fusing sub thermistor A/D Temperature:
value (temperature qC) 0 - 255qC (r1qC)
(Fusing belt) AD value: 0-1023 44-22
TEMPRATURE Process control thermistor Temperature:
detection level -40.0 - 60.0qC (r0.1qC)
Purpose Operation data display
AD value: 0-1023 Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
HUMIDITY Process control humidity Humidity: level in the halftone process control opera-
sensor detection level 5.0-90.0% (r0.1%), tion.
AD value: 0-1023
Section Process
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor detection Temperature:
level (A/D value) (qC) 5.0-60.0qC (r0.1qC) Operation/Procedure
AD value: 0-255 1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP],[2ND STEP] key.
The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
control operation is displayed.
44-15 Item/Display Content
Purpose Setting ID_n Patch data display
(PTK: n = 1 - 24, PTC/PTM/PTY: n = 1 - 16)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation.
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
Section Process BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 58
44-24 Default
Setting
Item/Display Content value
Purpose Operation data display range
K CMY
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60 60
the correction level in the halftone process UPPER LIMIT approximate
control operation. expression data upper
limit value
Section Process C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90 90
Operation/Procedure LOWER LIMIT approximate
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key. expression data lower
limit value
2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 6 2
UPPER LIMIT approximate
Category Item/Display Content
expression data upper
Coefficient [EX-LOW] Coefficient of the limit value
approximation formula of the
E HIGHLIGHT Reference point of the 1-8 7 7
minimum density
POINT highlight correction
[LOW] Coefficient of the amount
approximation formula of the
F HIGHTLIGHT Highlight correction 0 - 128 20 20
low density
VALUE LIMIT amount limit value
[CONNECT] Coefficient of the
G MAX VALUE Maximum density value 0 - 128 20 20
approximation formula of when
LIMIT correction limit value
connecting the low density and
the medium density
[MID] Coefficient of the
approximation formula of the
44-26
medium density
[HIGH] Coefficient of the Purpose Adjustment/Setup
approximation formula of the Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
high density
trol compulsory.
[CONNECT POINT] Each density section
connection output ratio Section Process
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Halftone process control Operation/Procedure
value reference value Press [EXECUTE] key.
Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control
The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
value correction value
are displayed.
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control
correction value
COMPLETE Normal complete
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer halftone process control
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
HT_VALUE] correction value
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process
[YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK]
correction control value
error
value
OTHER Other errors
44-25
44-27
Purpose Setting
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
correction value for the halftone process Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
tone process control.
control.
Section Process
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
touch panel. The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key.
Default
Setting
Item/Display Content value
range
K CMY
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98 98
LOWER LIMIT approximate
expression data lower
limit value
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 59
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
44-28
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
Section Process required.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the counter Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO of the OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
setting B SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process control 0-3 0 3
canceling power shut-off) Enable
Process control Disable 1
BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process control 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can be Enable
changed by INTERVAL TIME) Process control Disable 1
BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning ON Color process control 0-2 0 0
the power and after passing INTERVAL Enable
TIME. Process control Disable 1
BK process control Enable 2
E HUM The temperature and humidity inside the Color process control 0-2 0 0
machine are monitored only during a job at Enable
the interval set by the item of HUM HOUR. Process control Disable 1
When the changes in the temperature and BK process control Enable 2
the humidity are greater than the specified
level (the set value of item HUM DIF) in
comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of K or M OPC drum unit reaches the Inhibit 1
specified level after turning ON the power.
G REV2_BK YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of K OPC drum unit reaches the specified Inhibit 1
level from execution of the previous
density correction.
H REV2_CL YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of M OPC drum unit reaches the specified Inhibit 1
level from execution of the previous
density correction.
I REFRESH YES Select of YES/NO of the manual process Key operation display 0-1 0 1
MODE NO control key with key operation Key operation NO display 1
Setting of the J DAY When there is no color job from when the 0: Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
execution previous color process control was days judgment
conditions of performed to when the number of days set 1 - 999: 1 - 999 days 999
the process by this item setting, perform the process passing
control control when executing the next warming
up.
K HI-COV Setting of the execution conditions of the The process control is 0-2 0 0
process control for the print ratio performed by considering
the average print ratio of
every 10 pages as the
judgment criteria.
Print ratio judgment inhibit 1
(The process control for
the target of print ratio is
not performed.)
The process control is 2
performed by considering
the average print ratio of
30 pages as the judgment
criteria in a continuous
print job of 30 or more
pages.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 60
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Setting of the L LO-COV Setting of the execution judgment of the Enable 0-1 0 0
execution process control in continuous printing of Inhibit 1
conditions of low print ratio images
the process M TonerCA-END Setting of the process control interval Enable 0-1 0 1
control reduction when the toner cartridge Inhibit 1
remaining quantity is 25% or less (If this is
set to Enable, item M RATIO is changed.)
N AVERAGE-PAGE Setting of the number of pages of item HI- 1: 10 pages - 5: 50 pages 1-5 1 3
COV set value 2 1 step corresponds to 10 5
pages.
O LIMIT PAGE Setting of the number of connected jobs of 1: 10 pages - 10: 100 1 -10 1 10
the process control and of the limit number pages
of the process control 1 step corresponds to 10
A number of reservation jobs are pages. 10
connected. When the number of jobs
exceeds the specified number of pages
(the set value of this setting), the process
control is performed. / The process control
is performed by AND conditions of item
REV condition and the specified number of
pages (the set value of this setting).
P PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
The set value of 100 corresponds to K print of A4 at the print ratio of 5%.
Q PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count specified 1 - 999 10
value
The set value of 100 corresponds to K print of A4 at the print ratio of 5%.
R INTERVAL TIME Setting of the leaving time when turning ON the power (including the 1 - 255 3
sleep recovery time) (h: hour)
S HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (unit: 10 minutes)
T HUM_DIF The specified value of the area difference in humidity between the level 1-9 2
at execution of the previous control and the current humidity (Applied to
item HUM)
U BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK OPC 1 - 999 (Entry of 20 15
drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK" corresponds to
100,000mm.)
V M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M OPC drum traveling distance of 1 - 999 (Entry of 20 15
"REV2_CL" corresponds to
100,000mm.)
W COLOR BORDER Judgment criteria whether the BK high 0: The BK process control 0 - 999 20
density process control is individually is executed regardless of
performed or not (Setting of the ratio of the the M OPC drum traveling
M OPC drum rotation distance for the K distance.
OPC drum rotation distance (%)) 1 - 999: 1 - 999(%)
X BK ONLY Setting of the frequency of execution of the Frequency of once for 5 0-6 0 5
4-color high density process control when times
only monochrome output is continued (The Frequency of once for 1 - 5 1-5
result of this setting is applied only when times
the M OPC drum rotation distance is The 4-color high density 6
smaller than the set value of COLOR process control is always
BORDER.) performed.
Y HT_DIF HT process control execution judgment developing bias variation value 1 - 255 40
Setting of the Z RG_ON_ CL Setting of execution of the registration adjustment when executing the When the color 0 0
execution SYNC process control when turning ON the power process control is
condition of the executed.
registration ALL Executed 1
adjustment regardless of the
process control.
CL/BK When the color 2
process control
and the K process
control are
executed.
AA RG_TEMP_TIMER Time interval from registration adjustment after turning ON the power to 0 - 240 0
the next execution. (MINUTE)
AB RG_PERM_TIMER Setting of inhibit time of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 15 1
(HOUR)
AC RG_HOUR_TIMER Setting of the interval time of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 15 5
(Above)+(HOUR)
AD RG_BW_SYNC Setting of Enable/Disable of the Enable 0-1 0 1
registration adjustment after a Inhibit 1
monochrome job
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 61
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Setting of the AE 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 1 5 - 999 200
secondary TIME1 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
transfer time: Short)
cleaning AF 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 2 5 - 999 300
conditions TIME2 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Medium)
AG 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 3 5 - 999 500
TIME3 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Long)
When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the user process control execution button is displayed on the user system setting
menu.
When the color balance or the density change is not within the allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually and forcibly.
However, toner is consumed grater than as usual. This point must be explained to the user clearly.
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
44-31
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
ual adjustment)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simulation,
but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
1) Select item A with scroll key.
2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with
10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.)
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two
scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
5) Select item B with scroll key.
6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce-
dure 4).
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 62
44-37
Purpose Adjustment/Setup When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc- tion, this simulation is used.
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with scroll keys.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
<Use example>
(*1)
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value.
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller than that of the first sheet, increase the set value.
When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not work.
44-43
Purpose Data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
tion of the developing unit.
Section Developing system
Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.
* The developing unit is identified by the combination of items E, F, G, H and items I, J, K, and L.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 63
44-62
46
Purpose Setup/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
46-1
conditions.
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode)
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
Operation/Procedure
mode.
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28. Section
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending Operation/Procedure
on the condition. 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
1) Select an item to be set. panel.
To change the image density in the high density area, select 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PROCON TARGET. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
To change the frequency of the process control operations, item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
select PROCON MODE. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
Display/Item Content mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
PROCON CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease. in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
TARGET (The C/M/Y high density process control adjustment value.
target values decrease.)
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
(The C/M/Y high density process control increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
target values increase.) sity is decreased.
BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high
density process control target value Setting Default
Item/Display Content
decreases.) range value
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
density process control target value HIGH 1 - 99 50
increases.) B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values decrease.) PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase. D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control target values increase.) E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values are the standard
HIGH 1 - 99 50
values.)
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON HIGH QUALITY1 The execution frequency of the process
MODE control is high. (It is set when the color HIGH 1 - 99 50
image quality is given priority.) H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH QUALITY2 The execution frequency of the process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control is highest. (It is set when the color I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
image quality is given priority.) COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
PRINT The execution frequency of the process J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PERFORMANCE control is low. (It is set when the job PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
speed is given priority.) COPY) document)
BW MODE The process control is executed in the K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
normal frequency. (It is set when there (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
are little color jobs and many document)
monochrome jobs.) L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The process control is executed in the TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
normal frequency. ENHANCEMENT)
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
(When PROCON TARGET is selected.) PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
2A) Select the density level. TONE (Color tone
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
(When PROCON MODE is selected.) N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
2B) Select the execution frequency of the process control. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
4) Press [YES] key. (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
sion. TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 64
Setting Default 46-4
Item/Display Content
range value
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
document) send mode.
T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
black) copy
Section
HIGH 1 - 99 50
U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
(copy document) panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
46-2 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
increased, and vice versa.
mode.
Section
Setting Default
Operation/Procedure Mode Item/Display Content
range value
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
panel. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each PHOTO
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
adjustment value. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is PHOTO
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
sity is decreased. E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
Setting Default G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content
range value
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
46-5
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 send mode.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Section
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50 panel.
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
increased, and vice versa.
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 range value
COPY) document) LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
document) PHOTO
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 65
46-8 46-10
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and
balance RGB. the gamma (for each color copy mode).
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch 1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
panel. 2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch touch panel.
panel. 3) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. panel.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
area and the high density area. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
target color is increased, and vice versa. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
Default
Item/Display Content
value TEXT Text
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50 TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50 PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
MAP Map
LIGHT Light document
46-9
COPY ORG Copy document
Purpose Adjustment (RSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density. Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value
Section (Point)
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
panel. D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
mode, and the fax mode.
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
increased, and vice versa. M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
[RSPF] N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
Setting Default
Item/Display Content P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
range value
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48 46-16
adjustment (Low density side) Purpose Adjustment
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den-
adjustment (High density side)
sity and the gamma (for each monochrome
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
copy mode).
adjustment (Low density side)
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53 Section
adjustment (high density) Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 66
Density level 46-21
Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point) Purpose Adjustment
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
adjustment)
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 Section
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 Operation/Procedure
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 touch panel.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 panel.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 increased, and vice versa.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
46-19 value.
Purpose Setting
Density level Default
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
density scanning (exposure) of mono- A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
chrome auto copy mode documents. B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
Section C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
saved. H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
Default
Item/Display Content Set value J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
value
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE1
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/ M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
Stop (for FAX) P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
Stop (for scanner) STOP/
PRESCAN
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL 46-23
SHARP Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
high density section (High density tone gap
supported).
Section
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
Operation/Procedure
MODE 2 Normal gamma
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
scanned, and the output image density is determined
according to the scanned density. (The output image 0 Enable
density is even for all the surface.) 1 Inhibit
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
according to the density in each area of document. (The
output image density may not be even for all the Setting Default
Item/Display Content
surface.) range value
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
sequentially, and the output image density is determined (0: ENABLE density correction
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
output image density is even for all the surface.) 1 CMY engine highest
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome density correction
FULL auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the mode: Disable
document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
mode. (0: ENABLE density correction
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 1 K engine highest
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode. density correction
mode: Disable
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 67
Setting Default 46-26
Item/Display Content
range value
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment
TARGET CYAN maximum density Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color
correction balance set value to the default.
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
Section
correction Operation/Procedure
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TARGET YELLOW maximum density
2) Press [YES] key.
correction
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the
TARGET BLACK maximum density default value.
correction
46-27
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
and B to "0". Purpose Adjustment/Setup
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy
gap is better. images, texts, and line image edges.
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items Section
A and B to "1". Operation/Procedure
The tone gap may occur in high density part. 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
are changed, the density in the high density area is changed.
Item/Display Setting Default
Content
46-24 (Copy mode) range value
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
(Auto adjustment) (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
Section C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
Operation/Procedure
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (INTERCEPT) adjustment
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed, When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the
then the adjustment result pattern is printed. gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed.
4) Press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
The halftone correction target registration is processed.
value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge
is decreased.
46-25
When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased,
Purpose Adjustment the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin- vice versa.
gle color copy mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
target color is increased, and vice versa.
Default value
Item/Display Setting range
C M Y
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 68
46-30 46-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
scanning direction in the copy mode. density reproducibility in the monochrome
Section auto copy mode.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- Operation/Procedure
sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key. 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0 When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1 background and the low density image is increased. When the
SW (COPY: COLOR) adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
[RSPF]
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)
Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400% Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification range value
ratio] ratio] ratio] A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Mode1 OC 600 600 1200 B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
RSPF 600 600 1200 C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Mode2 OC 300 600 1200 D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
RSPF 400 600 1200 E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
46-36
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color
copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 69
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from Item/Display Select Default
the formula below. Content
(Copy mode) button value
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio MANUAL COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual)
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
values (Default). NOMAL
(+) LUT1
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
(+) LUT2
the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
value is decreased, the density is increased.
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Printed photo
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, NOMAL (Manual)
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust- (+) LUT1
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased. (+) LUT2
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light document NORMAL
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 (Manual)
46-38 NOMAL
Purpose Adjustment/Setup (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
amount in the color copy mode. (-) LUT1 judgment 0
Section NOMAL
Operation/Procedure (+) LUT1
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode (+) LUT2
key. AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 1
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
NOMAL
3) Press the black component amount select key. (+) LUT1
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. (+) LUT2
(except character and line image) AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part (-) LUT1 judgment 2
changes. NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Item/Display Select Default
Content AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(Copy mode) button value
(-) LUT1 judgment 3
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
NOMAL
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 4
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
NOMAL
(-) LUT1
(+) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
AUTO5 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 5
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
NOMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 6
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph/Text NORMAL
NOMAL
(-) LUT1 photograph
(Manual) (+) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 Text printed
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 70
46-39 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
images. C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Section D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. MODE mode Exposure 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 2
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) EXP2 Exposure 2 3
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large EXP3 Exposure 3 4
numeric value to decrease moire. EXP4 Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
Setting Default To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-
Item/Display Content
range value
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
and press [EXECUTE] key.
halftone OFF
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 46-42
halftone ON
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1 (Fine)
halftone ON Section
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
Operation/Procedure
halftone OFF
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 1) Set the document on the document table.
halftone ON 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
halftone OFF
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
and the scanned document image is outputted.
halftone ON
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
46-40 range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Section E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
1) Set the document on the document table. G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key Halftone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
and the scanned document image is outputted. Halftone
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
Setting Default Halftone
Item/Display Content
range value K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50 Halftone
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
adjustment of all the modes) Halftone
46-41
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Normal)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 71
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO) Exposure 5/Halftone
Exposure 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1- 1 1
EXP2 Fine/ 3 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Exposure 2 EXP1 Super Fine/ 2
EXP3 Fine/ 4 Exposure 1
Exposure 3 EXP2 Super Fine/ 3
EXP4 Fine/ 5 Exposure 2
Exposure 4 EXP3 Super Fine/ 4
EXP5 Fine/ 6 Exposure 3
Exposure 5 EXP4 Super Fine/ 5
AUTO Fine/ 7 Exposure 4
H_TONE Automatic/ EXP5 Super Fine/ 6
halftone Exposure 5
EXP1 Fine/ 8 AUTO Super Fine/ 7
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
EXP2 Fine/ 9 EXP1 Super Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 2/ H_TONE Exposure 1/
Halftone Halftone
EXP3 Fine/ 10 EXP2 Super Fine/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 3/ H_TONE Exposure 2/
Halftone Halftone
EXP4 Fine/ 11 EXP3 Super Fine/ 10
H_ONE Exposure 4/ H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone Halftone
EXP5 Fine/ 12 EXP4 Super Fine/ 11
H_TONE Exposure 5/ H_TONE Exposure 4/
Halftone Halftone
EXP5 Super Fine/ 12
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- H_TONE Exposure 5/
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, Halftone
and press [EXECUTE] key.
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-43
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. 46-44
(Super Fine)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
Operation/Procedure (Ultra fine)
1) Set the document on the document table.
Section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
1) Set the document on the document table.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
and the scanned document image is outputted.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
Setting Default When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
Item/Display Content
range value and the scanned document image is outputted.
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Exposure 1 range value
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3 D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Exposure 4 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 5 Halftone
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Auto/Halftone H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1/Halftone H_TONE Exposure 2/Halftone
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2/Halftone H_TONE Exposure 3/Halftone
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3/Halftone H_TONE Exposure 4/Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 4/Halftone H_TONE Exposure 5/Halftone
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 72
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1- 1 1
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2 EXP1 600dpi/ 2
Exposure 1 Exposure 1
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3 EXP2 600dpi/ 3
Exposure 2 Exposure 2
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4 EXP3 600dpi/ 4
Exposure 3 Exposure 3
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5 EXP4 600dpi/ 5
Exposure 4 Exposure 4
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6 EXP5 600dpi/ 6
Exposure 5 Exposure 5
AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7 AUTO 600dpi/ 7
H_TONE Auto/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8 EXP1 600dpi/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Exposure
Halftone 1/Halftone
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9 EXP2 600dpi/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2/ H_TONE Exposure
Halftone 2/Halftone
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10 EXP3 600dpi/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3/ H_TONE Exposure
Halftone 3/Halftone
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11 EXP4 600dpi/ 11
H_TONE Exposure 4/ H_TONE Exposure
Halftone 4/Halftone
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12 EXP5 600dpi/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/ H_TONE Exposure
Halftone 5/Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key. and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-45 46-47
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
(600dpi). and scan images (JPEG).
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set The set value is saved.
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Setting Default mode range value
Item/Display Content
range value FILLING A COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 (COLOR) (C) compres-
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 (COPY sion (Color)
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 (COLOR MIDDLE Medium 1
mode)) compres-
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
sion (Color)
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
HIGH High 2
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
compres-
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
sion (Color)
Halftone 1
FILLING B COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
(GRAY) (G) compres-
Halftone
(COPY sion (Gray)
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 (Mono- MIDDLE Medium 1
Halftone chrome compres-
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 halftone sion (Gray)
Halftone mode)) HIGH High 2
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 compres-
Halftone sion (Gray)
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 73
Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content Density level Default
mode range value Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
PUSH C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
SCAN (C) 1 compres- (MIDDLE
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
(COLOR) sion mode 1 2)
(Scanner Low C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
(Color compres- D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
mode)) sion E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
MIDDLE Medium 1 F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
2 compres- G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
sion mode 2 H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
Medium I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
compres- J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
sion
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
MIDDLE Medium 2
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
3 compres-
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
sion mode 3
High N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
compres- O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
sion P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
PUSH D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
SCAN (G) 1 compres- (MIDDLE
(GRAY) sion mode 1 2)
(Scanner Low
(Mono- compres- 46-52
chrome sion
halftone
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
MIDDLE Medium 1
mode)) 2 compres- Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
sion mode 2 mode heavy paper and the image process
Medium mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54
compres- or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset
sion
to the initial value.)
MIDDLE Medium 2
3 compres- Section
sion mode 3 Operation/Procedure
High 1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
compres-
sion To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
46-51
46-54
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto-
mode heavy paper mode and the image
matic density adjustment (dither).
process mode.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key
[PAPER/DITHER]. The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
feed tray is used.)
touch panel.
2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
[EXECUTE] key.
touch panel.
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.
automatically printed.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out-
3) Press [OK] key.
putted.
After completion of the correction amount registration, the
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is
screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
the image density. 4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 74
6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press Content Setting Default
[EXECUTE] key. Mode Item/Display
(copy mode) range value
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started. MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the ON 1
dither selection menu. B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
items (dither), press [OK] key.
ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
46-58 E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup photograph ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu-
ON 1
tion. (Smoothing process)
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
Section ON 1
Operation/Procedure H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0 (OFF)
1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll document ON 1
key. I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
3) Press [OK] key. TXT PRT (copy ON 1
1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi document)
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy ON 1
The setting is reflected only the image edge area.
document)
Content Setting Default
Mode Item/Display
(copy mode) range value
COLOR A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0 (OFF)
photograph ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0 (OFF)
document ON 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT (copy ON 1
document)
K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy ON 1
document)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 75
46-59
Purpose Adjustment/Setup This adjustment is valid when SIM46-58 Pseudo resolution
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy mode pseudo setting is set to ON.
resolution image process adjustment. The thickness of images in the section processed by smooth-
Section ing is changed.
Operation/Procedure Positive: The image in the section processed by smoothing
1) Select the MAIN (main scanning direction) or the SUB (sub becomes thicker.
scanning direction) button. Negative: The image in the section processed by smoothing
2) Press the button of the adjustment value of the target copy becomes thinner.
mode.
Scanning direction Item (copy mode) Adjustment button Content Default value NOTE
MAIN COLOR COPY K (-)2 Color copy For BLACK 0 Main scanning direction smoothing
(-)1 fine adjustment
0 Negative (-) direction: The
(+)1 smoothing section becomes
thinner.
(+)2
Positive (+) direction: The
COLOR COPY C (-)2 Color copy For CYAN 0
smoothing section becomes
(-)1 thicker.
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR COPY M (-)2 Color copy For MAGENTA 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR COPY Y (-)2 Color copy For YELLOW 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MONO COPY K (-)2 Monochrome copy For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT K (-)2 Color print For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT C (-)2 Color print For CYAN 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT M (-)2 Color print For MAGENTA 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT Y (-)2 Color print For YELLOW 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MONO PRINT K (-)2 Monochrome print For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 76
Scanning direction Item (copy mode) Adjustment button Content Default value NOTE
SUB COLOR COPY K (-)2 Color copy For BLACK 0 Sub scanning direction smoothing
(-)1 fine adjustment
0 Negative (-) direction: The
(+)1 smoothing section becomes
thinner.
(+)2
Positive (+) direction: The
COLOR COPY C (-)2 Color copy For CYAN 0
smoothing section becomes
(-)1 thicker.
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR COPY M (-)2 Color copy For MAGENTA 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR COPY Y (-)2 Color copy For YELLOW 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MONO COPY K (-)2 Monochrome copy For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT K (-)2 Color print For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT C (-)2 Color print For CYAN 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT M (-)2 Color print For MAGENTA 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT Y (-)2 Color print For YELLOW 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MONO PRINT K (-)2 Monochrome print For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 77
46-60
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 78
46-61 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- [SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High
tion level. density dots
Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Section [SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium
Operation/Procedure density dots
1) Select an adjustment mode. R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
density dots
panel.
S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. [SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
4) Press [OK] key. T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line
This must be set to the default unless any change is specially screen
required.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
ments. 46-62
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Item/Display Content
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto
ACS, the area separation, the background
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)
image process, and the auto exposure
COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print)
mode.
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print) Section
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text Operation/Procedure
print)
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Setting Default 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Item/Display Content
range value
3) Press [OK] key.
A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot
B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[LINE SCR] line screen This must be set to the default unless any change is specially
C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 required.
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
[HIGH LPI] High line number
judgment select ments.
E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
Setting Default
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send Item/Display Content
range value
SEND] dots
A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference 0-1 1
F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
area select
[BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
1 B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
priority level adjustment
G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
1 priority level adjustment
H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text threshold value
2, Color text 2 adjustment
I SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment target 0-6 3
[TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on area adjustment
dots F AE_LV_CC AE background detection 0-8 4
J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 division result
[TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on adjustment:
dots For color copy
K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8 G AE_LV_MC AE background detection 0-8 4
[TXT ON SCR AREA] adjustment: Detection division result
area of text on dots adjustment:
For monochrome copy
L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line H AE_LV_CS AE background detection 0-8 4
number judgment division result
adjustment:
M SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
For color scan
[BK] adjustment: No
chrome judgment I AE_LV_MS AE background detection 0-8 4
division result
N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
adjustment:
[CL] adjustment: Chrome
For monochrome scan
judgment
J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
_LV_L_U density threshold value
[TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on
adjustment (lower limit)
background
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 79
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0 J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
LV_L_O density threshold value PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
adjustment (upper limit) TO COPY) (color copy)
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5 K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3
LV_C detection level TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
adjustment (chroma) L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch: OFF 1 PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
_CC For color copy N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch: OFF 1 O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
_MC For mono- TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
chrome copy P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_CS For color scan
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) 46-65
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_MS For mono- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
chrome copy Function (Purpose) Used to set the color correction table.
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Section
LV_L adjustment (value)
R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 Operation/Procedure
LV_C adjustment (chroma) 1) Select an adjustment mode.
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0 2) Select an item (mode) to be set with the scroll key.
paper mode select
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select 4) Press [OK] key.
U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0 When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func-
paper mode select tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0 mode.
paper mode select
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
46-63
COPY A [MANUAL] TEXT Text print 0-8 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup PRT
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low B [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-8 0
density section. C [MANUAL] Printed 0-8 0
PRINTED PHOTO Photo
Section D [MANUAL] Photograph 0-8 1
Operation/Procedure PHOTO
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch E [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-8 1
panel. PHOTO photograph
F [MANUAL] MAP Map 0-8 0
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
G [MANUAL] LIGHT Pencil 0-8 0
3) Press [OK] key. H [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-8 0
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the TO CPT/TXT PRT document/
background and the low density image is increased. When the Text print
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background I [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-8 0
and the low density image is decreased. TO CPT/TEXT document/
Text
Setting Default J [MANUAL] CPY Copy 0-8 0
Item/Display Content
range value TO CPY/PHOTO document/
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3 Printed
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) Photo
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3 K AUTO0 Automatic 0-8 2
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5 mode
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) judgment 0
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5 L AUTO1 Automatic 0-8 2
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy) mode
judgment 1
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy) M AUTO2 Automatic 0-8 3
mode
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
judgment 2
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
N AUTO3 Automatic 0-8 3
(color density)
mode
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
judgment 3
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
O AUTO4 Automatic 0-8 2
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
mode
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
judgment 4
(COPY TO COPY) Character
P AUTO5 Automatic 0-8 2
(color copy)
mode
judgment 5
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 80
Setting Default 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
Mode Item/Display Content ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment
range value
COPY Q AUTO6 Automatic 0-8 2 result pattern is printed.
mode 7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered.
judgment 6
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
PREVIEW A [MANUAL] TEXT Text print 0-4 0
(Preview PRT When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
screen) B [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-4 0 ment is completed.
C [MANUAL] Printed 0-4 0
PRINTED PHOTO Photo
D [MANUAL] Photograph 0-4 1 The adjustment result becomes effective only when the adjustment
PHOTO
procedure for both copy and print mode have completed success-
E [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-4 1
fully. For example, when the copy color balance adjustment (auto-
PHOTO photograph
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the
F [MANUAL] MAP Map 0-4 0
adjustment result is not effective.
G [MANUAL] LIGHT Pencil 0-4 0
H [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-4 0
TO CPT/TXT PRT document/
Text print
I [MANUAL] CPT
TO CPT/TEXT
Copy
document/
0-4 0 48
Text
J [MANUAL] CPY Copy 0-4 0 48-1
TO CPY/PHOTO document/ Purpose Adjustment
Printed
Photo Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
K AUTO0 Automatic 0-4 2 tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
mode and the sub scanning direction).
judgment 0 Section
L AUTO1 Automatic 0-4 2
Operation/Procedure
mode
judgment 1 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
M AUTO2 Automatic 0-4 3 panel.
mode 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
judgment 2
3) Press [OK] key.
N AUTO3 Automatic 0-4 3
mode The set value is saved.
judgment 3 When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
O AUTO4 Automatic 0-4 2 ratio is increased.
mode
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
judgment 4
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
P AUTO5 Automatic 0-4 2
mode A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
judgment 5 sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
Q AUTO6 Automatic 0-4 2 [RSPF]
mode
judgment 6 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
46-74 (CCD)
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment
magnification ratio adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto (CCD)
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
ment (Auto adjustment) magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
Section
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure magnification ratio adjustment
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- (Sub scan)
uously. E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
magnification ratio adjustment
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is (Sub scan)
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is
printed.
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment pattern is printed.
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 81
48-5 Mode Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Select range value
Purpose Adjustment COLOR* G POM Paper exit motor 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi- correction value
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction). HEAVY H FUSER Fusing speed select 1 - 99 60
SETTING timing
Section Scanner section
HEAVY I RRM Registration motor 0 - 255 109
Operation/Procedure START speed increasing start
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch timing
panel. HEAVY J RRM Registration motor 0 - 255 210
END speed increasing end
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
timing
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved. * Common items for color, monochrome, and heavy paper
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is ** Common items for color and monochrome
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci- The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform vice versa. Change by ±1 corresponds to 0.1%.
this adjustment.
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there 49
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
49-1
Setting Default Purpose
Item/Display Content
range value Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
Section
C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
(High speed) 2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 operation panel section.)
(Reference speed)
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
4) Select a target firmware.
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
48-6 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Adjustment 6) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each The selected firmware is updated. When the operation is nor-
motor. mally completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated
Section abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO] Error display in
Item/Display Content
[HEAVY] keys on the touch panel. case of abnormality
CONFIG Configuration data CONF
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section ICUM
panel.
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main ICUBM
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN ICUCN
4) Press [OK] key. ICU (SUB) ICU Sub section (ARM9) ICUS
The set value is saved. LANGUAGE Language support data LANG
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased, program
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD GRAPH
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed. SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLIST
PCL (BOOT) PCL Boot section PCLB
Mode Setting Default PCL (MAIN) PCL Main section PCLM
Item/Display Content
Select range value PCL (CONFIG) PCL Configuration data PCLC
COLOR A RRM Registration motor 1 - 99 51 PCL (PROFILE) PCL Color profile PCLP
MONO correction value PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUB
HEAVY PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section PCUM
COLOR B BTM Belt motor correction 1 - 99 47 DESK (BOOT) Desk unit boot section DESKB
MONO value DESK (MAIN) Desk unit main section DESKM
HEAVY FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher boot section FINB
COLOR C DVM_K Developing K motor 1 - 99 45 FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main section FINM
MONO correction value SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUB
HEAVY SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section SCUM
COLOR** D FSM Fusing motor 1 - 99 44 FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXB
HEAVY correction value 41 FAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXM
ANIMATION Animation data ANIME
COLOR E DVM_CL Developing CL motor 1 - 99 45 WEB HELP WEB help WEBHP
HEAVY correction value EOSA Embedded OSA EOSA
COLOR* F PFM Paper transport motor 1 - 99 48
correction value
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 82
49-3 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the edge edge reference
HDD. adjust- position (OC)
Section B ment RRCB-CS1 Regis- Standard 1 - 99 60
value tration Tray
Operation/Procedure
C RRCB-DSK motor Desk 1 - 99 60
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. D RRCB-LCC ON LCC 1 - 99 60
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- E RRCB-MFT timing Manual 1 - 99 60
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is adjust- paper
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. ment feed
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 60
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
loss area loss area setting
The current version and the update version are displayed. setting
H SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. value area adjustment
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
active from gray out. adjust- area adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
area adjustment
updated.
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- REAR area adjustment
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
49-5 M Magnificat SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
ion ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
Purpose correc- OC adjustment (CCD)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. tion
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
Section scanning correction value
Operation/Procedure O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark value value
update.
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. value
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
5) Press [YES] key. value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
The selected watermark is updated.
value
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50
value
U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
50 correction value
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 83
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0r2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead edge image 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the
position. printer. When the adjustment value of this item is
(PRINTER MODE) decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the
adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the
print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction
for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and
right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is
increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the
correction value adjustment value of DEN-B
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 55
correction value
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 84
50-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss. (RSPF mode)
Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
[RSPF]
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount amount setting
setting
SIDE1
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount
amount setting
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
amount amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40
(SIDE2) edge image loss
amount setting
I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
J OFSET_SPF2 SPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
back surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 85
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 86
50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
ning direction)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 87
50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
The contents of the following list are mainly used by the technical
division, and are not necessary for the market.
Default
Item/Display Content Display NOTE
value
MAIN F C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side) 199.0
MAIN R C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side) 199.0
SUB C Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Cyan drum to black drum) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum) 199.0
SKEW C Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) -99.9 - - If the value is plus, R is displayed to left side of
99.9 numerical value. If the value is minus, L is displayed
M Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) -99.9 - - to left side of numerical value.
99.9 When the value is -4 - +4, "(OK)" is place at the back
Y Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow) -99.9 - - of the value. For the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed.
99.9 *1
PHASE Phase Angle step 1-8 2 Same item as SIM44-31.
adjustment 0q(1) o 45q(2) o 90q(3) o 135q(4) o 180q(5) o 225q(6)
value BK o 270q(7) o 315q(8)
o CL
Phase 2 Same item as SIM44-31. (50-sheet machine)
adjustment
value C
Phase 4
adjustment
value M
Phase 5
adjustment
value Y
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 88
Color/ Default
Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) NOTE
History value
MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment 1.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) correction amount main scanning
direction F
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction -199.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one,
main scanning F
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment 1.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) correction value, main scanning
direction R
() REG_M_R Registration value correction -199.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 0
(DIF) amount from the previous one,
main scanning R
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment 1.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) correction value, sub scanning
direction
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction -199.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one,
sub scanning
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC SKEW adjustment rotating L99.9 - R99.9 (r0.1) KCMY/- 0 If the value is plus, L is
direction and the number of clicks displayed to left side of
(CMY) numerical value. If the value is
minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
When the value is -2.1 - +2.1,
"(OK)" is place at the back of
the value. For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *1
ALL_ SKEW adjustment rotating If the value is plus, L is
ROTATE direction and the number of clicks displayed to left side of
(K) numerical value. If the value is
minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
When the value is -1.6 - +1.6,
"(OK)" is place at the back of
the value. For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *2
PHASE PHASE_ADJ Phase adjustment value (1: Value 1 - 8 (r1) -/2 1 -
of this time, 2: Value of the
previous time)
Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q
(3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) o 225q
(6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
*2: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the value.
When "L" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number of the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 89
50-24
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,
50-20, 21 and 22.
Section
Operation/Procedure
50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
[RSPF]
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
amount setting amount setting
E SPF SIDE1 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
setting
F TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
amount setting
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
amount setting amount setting
H SPF SIDE2 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
setting
I TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
amount setting
When image send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
mode (Except for B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and copy) C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
amount setting amount setting
E SPF SIDE1 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
setting
F TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
amount setting
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
amount setting amount setting
H SPF SIDE2 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
setting
I TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
amount setting
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 90
50-28 Item/Display Content Section
Purpose Adjustment BK-MAG MFT BK main scanning Main scanning Engine
ADJ CS1 magnification ratio direction image
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image magnification ratio
CS2
loss, void area, image off-center, and image adjustment
ADU
magnification ratio.
CS3
Section CS4
Operation/Procedure LCC
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28. RESULT Adjustment result display
* ADJ16 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, DATA Adjustment operation data display
off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments)
* ADJ 17 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
* ADJ 18 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
51
* ADJ 19 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image
loss (Manual adjustments)
51-1
1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
secondary transport voltage.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
5) Press [OK] key. Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content Section 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
OC ADJ MFT Document lead Image loss off- Scanner panel.
CS1 edge center sub scanning
direction image
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CS2
ADU Document off- magnification ratio 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
center adjustment When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
CS3
Sub scanning (Document table ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
CS4
magnification ratio mode)
LCC increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
Item/Display Content Section by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
SPF ALL SIDE1 MFT Document Image loss Scanner
Default
ADJ (Front lead edge off-center Item/Display Content
value
(RSPF) surface) sub
Document scanning A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage ON 50
SIDE2 CS1
off-center direction timing setting
(Back CS2
surface) Sub image B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage OFF 60
ADU
scanning magnifica- timing setting
CS3
magnifica- tion ratio
CS4
tion ratio adjustment
LCC Document (RSPF
lead edge mode) 51-2
Document
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
off-center
Sub Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
scanning tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
magnifica- the RSPF registration roller. (This adjust-
tion ratio ment is performed when there is a consid-
erable variation in the print image position
Item/Display Content Section on the paper or when paper jams frequently
SETUP/ ALL LEAD MFT Print off Print lead Engine occur.)
PRINT CS1 center edge
Section
ADJ CS2 Print lead adjustment,
edge image off- Operation/Procedure
OFFSET ADU
center 1) (When RSPF model)
CS3
(each paper
CS4 Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
feed tray,
LCC [ENGINE] keys.
duplex
mode) 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
adjustment 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 91
[RSPF]
Mode Display/Ite Content Setting range Default value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/
HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/
LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/
HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/
LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Random/Plain
paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Random/Plain
paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Random/Thin
paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Random/Thin
paper/LOW)
SIDE2 A NORMAL_PLAIN_ RSPF back surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
HIGH_1 amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain
paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_ RSPF back surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
LOW_1 amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain
paper/LOW)
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
adjustment value or less
(Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
adjustment value or above
(Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(S) adjustment value or less
(Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(L) adjustment value or above
(Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
adjustment value or less
(Plain paper/Small size)
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
adjustment value or above
(Plain paper/Large size)
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(S) adjustment value or less
(Heavy paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(L) adjustment value or above
(Heavy paper/Large size)
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(S) (Plain paper/Small size) or less
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(L) (Plain paper/Large size) or above
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(S) (Heavy paper/Small size) or less
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(L) (Heavy paper/Large size) or above
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 10
(OHP)
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 10
(Envelope)
O ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
P ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Large size) or above
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(Heavy paper/Small size) or less
R ADU HEAVY PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(Heavy paper/Large size) or above
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 92
Mode Display/Ite Content Setting range Default value
ENGINE S DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
T DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Large size) or above
U DESK HEAVY PAPER DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(S) (Heavy paper/Small size) or less
V DESK HEAVY PAPER DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(L) (Heavy paper/Large size) or above
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 30
53-7
53
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size
53-6
width sensor.
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
Operation/Procedure
RSPF document width.
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
Section panel.
Operation/Procedure 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[RSPF]
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
Setting Default
3) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. Item/Display
range value
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
The A4R width detection level is recognized. B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
5) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
reference position
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 93
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A ADJUST RSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 5
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
stop position adjustment)
53-9
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set dirt detection for RSPF scan-
ning position.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an items to be set with scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A DIRT_ALARM_SET OFF RSPF dirt alarm setting OFF 0 to 1 0 1
ON ON 1 (OFF)
B SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_START OFF RSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0 to 1 0 1
ON setting (When starting) ON 1 (ON)
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB OFF RSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0 to 1 0 1
ON setting (After a job) ON 1 (ON)
D SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV WEAK RSPF front surface optimum scan position detection Low 0 to 2 0 1
MIDDLE level setting Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
E OC_DIRT_LV WEAK OC dirt level setting Low 0 to 2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
F SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK RSPF front surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0 to 2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
G SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF RSPF front surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0 to 1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
55
53-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 55-1
Function (Purpose) RSPF dirt detection execution. Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
Section required.)
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. control operations. (SOFT SW)
Section
Item Content Operation/Procedure
SPF SIDEA RSPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan
position 1 to 8)
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt
55-2
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position
1 to 8) Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 94
55-3
56
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
56-1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW) Purpose Backup
Section Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
Operation/Procedure
PWB.)
Section
55-10 Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
only) Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Section
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. EEPROM o HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key. HDD o EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 56-2
range value
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1 Purpose Data backup
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 32 [blank: SD Card, and HDD (including user authen-
20H]
tication data and address data) to the USB
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 65 - 90
memory. (Corresponding to the device
[Alphabet:
41H("A) -
cloning and the storage backup.)
5AH("Z")] Section
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit 48 - 57 Operation/Procedure
[Numeral:
30H("0") -
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
39H("9")] 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right <IMPORT>
edge) From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD
G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
<EXPORT>
C input 1
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY
M 2
Y 3
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
R 4 Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
G 5 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
B 6 displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging 0 1 (Machine with the DSK installed)
1 com- type
posing
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
PATTERN OR 1
2 method process 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
type <IMPORT>
PATTERN No- 2 From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD
3 delete-
<EXPORT>
compo-
sition type
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Enter the password with 10-key.
Input value 4) Press [SET] key.
Print Blank A B C E F G 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Input value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71 Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Print H I J K L M N
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Input value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
<Data list outside the backup targets>
Print O P Q R T U V (EEPROM/SD Card)
Input value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86
PWB Type Content NOTE
Print W X Y Z 0 1 2 Controller Machine serial No.
Input value 87 88 89 90 48 49 50 Product key information
Various counter Copy counter/FAX
send counter etc.
Print 3 5 6 7 8 9
Trouble history
Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 95
PWB Type Content NOTE 56-5
PCU Machine serial No.
Various counter Maintenance counter
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Machine adjustment execute Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
history memory in the TEXT format.
Trouble history Section
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
Operation/Procedure
Trouble history
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
(HDD) 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Classifi- 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Content NOTE
cation Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
Japanese User dictionary When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
FEP
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Job end list Job end list display data
(The image send series include
the preserved job list.)
Log Job log Read from WEB is 56-6
enable. Purpose Operation data check
New N/A • Print history information
• JAM history information Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM23-2 data to a USB
• Trouble history information memory in the TEXT format.
• Same position continuous jam Section
count value
• Charging information
Operation/Procedure
• Life information 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Operation E-manual 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
manual
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
56-3 56-7
Purpose Data backup Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to Function (Purpose) Used to import the syslog data to a USB
the USB memory. memory.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
<IMPORT> 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 60
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is 60-1
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
(read/write) of the MFP PWB.
56-4
Section
Purpose Data backup
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
USB memory.
Start the test.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Result display Description
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
OK Success
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key. NG Fail
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. NONE DIMM trouble
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. INVALID Execution disable
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 96
61
61-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
tion and laser detection.
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Display Content
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
61-3
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
FAX] on the touch panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
Default value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm
range linkage
machine machine
COPY A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 110 148
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 110 148
C LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C1) 0 - 255 110 148
D LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C2) 0 - 255 110 148
E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 110 148
F LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M2) 0 - 255 110 148
G LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y1) 0 - 255 110 148
H LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y2) 0 - 255 110 148
I LASER POWER LOW (K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K1) 0 - 255 141 141
J LASER POWER LOW (K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K2) 0 - 255 141 141
K LASER POWER LOW (C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C1) 0 - 255 141 141
L LASER POWER LOW (C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C2) 0 - 255 141 141
M LASER POWER LOW (M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M1) 0 - 255 141 141
N LASER POWER LOW (M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M2) 0 - 255 141 141
O LASER POWER LOW (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y1) 0 - 255 141 141
P LASER POWER LOW (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y2) 0 - 255 141 141
Q LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW1) 0 - 255 110 148
R LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW2) 0 - 255 110 148
S LASER POWER LOW (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW1) 0 - 255 141 141
T LASER POWER LOW (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW2) 0 - 255 141 141
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 110 148
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 110 148
C LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C1) 0 - 255 110 148
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 97
Default value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm
range linkage
machine machine
PR600/FAX D LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C2) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
F LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M2) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
G LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y1) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
H LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y2) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
I LASER POWER LOW (K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
J LASER POWER LOW (K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
K LASER POWER LOW (C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
L LASER POWER LOW (C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
M LASER POWER LOW (M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
N LASER POWER LOW (M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
O LASER POWER LOW (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
P LASER POWER LOW (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
Q LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW1) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
R LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW2) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
S LASER POWER LOW (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
T LASER POWER LOW (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0
AE LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0
AF LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0
AG LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0
AH LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0
AI LASER DUTY LOW (K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0
AJ LASER DUTY LOW (C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0
AK LASER DUTY LOW (M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0
AL LASER DUTY LOW (Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0
AM LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0
AN LASER DUTY LOW (BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0
61-4
62
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust-
62-1
ment pattern. (LSU unit)
Purpose Data clear
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk/SD Card.
Operation/Procedure
(HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and
1) Select a target item with scroll key on the touch panel. the watermark data) (SD Card: User data)
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key.
Section
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Default 2) Press [YES] key.
Item/Display Content
value Used to execute the HDD/SD Card format.
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1 When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper feed 2 normal display.
CS1 selection 2 Paper feed tray 1 (Paper
CS2 3 Paper feed tray 2 feed tray
CS3 4 Paper feed tray 3 1)
CS4 5 Paper feed tray 4 62-2
LCC 6 LCC Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(partial).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 98
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
62-3
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
Purpose Operation test/check NG" is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
Section 62-10
Operation/Procedure Purpose Data clear
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.
2) Press [YES] key. Section
Read/write operations are performed. Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
62-6
Used to delete the job log data.
Purpose Operation test/check When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the normal display.
hard disk.
Section
Operation/Procedure 62-11
1) Select the self diag area. Purpose Data clear
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
The self diag operation is performed. Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this
2) Press [YES] key.
simulation to cheek the HDD.
Used to delete the document filing data.
SHORT S.T Partial area diag When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
EXTENDED S.T All area diag normal display.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 99
62-14 Display item Description Remarks
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
Purpose Data clear CODE 1: Loop number over
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing manage- 2: The target value is
ment data. under the speci-
Section HDD fied value
Operation/Procedure 3: The gain set value is
negative.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4: END is not asserted.
2) Press [YES] key. (Gain adjustment)
The document filing management data are cleared. 5: Reserve
At the same time, the job log data are also cleared. 6: Underflow
7: Black shading error
This simulation is executed in the following trouble cases.
8: Other error
* The document filing function does not work normally. 9: END is not asserted.
* The job log is not recorded normally. (White shading)
10: END is not asserted.
(Black shading)
11: END is not asserted.
(Light quantity
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. correction)
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- 12: END is not asserted.
sion. 13: Register check error
(White booting/Before
gain)
14: Register check error
(Before light quantity
63 correction)
RSPF BACK First scan RSPF back
WHITE surface white reference
63-1 LEVEL 1ST level
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check RSPF BACK Second scan RSPF back
WHITE surface white reference
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
LEVEL 2ND level
result.
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
63-2
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
panel. Purpose Adjustment
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys. 63-8
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
63-5 Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
Purpose Adjustment/Setup of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color ment.
balance and gamma default setting. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key 2) Press [YES] key.
2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
default. adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
63-6 for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check balance as the factory color balance target.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the scan level and the den-
sity level of the copy color balance adjust-
ment patch. 63-11
Section Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
1) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
SIM46-21 on the document table. Section
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. 1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
Default
Item/Display Content
value
63-7 Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup color target in the automatic color balance
balance operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the When this target is selected, the color
copy mode auto color balance adjustment. balance is converted into natural gray
Section color balance by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
Operation/Procedure
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. target in the automatic color balance
2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with operation is slightly shifted to natural gray
SIM46-21 on the document table. color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. actual copy mode and print is made.
4) Press [OK] key. DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the
this target is selected, the color balance is
scanned adjustment pattern sheet. converted into the color balance with
The registered color balance and the density are displayed. enhanced Cyan by the color table in an
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. actual copy mode and print is made.
64-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
64-4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Writing
range value
A COPIES Number of print 1 - 999 1 No
B PROC YES 0 The halftone 0-1 1 Yes
ADJ process control
correction
value is
reflected.
NO 1 The halftone
process control
correction
value is not
reflected.
65-5
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
65 input.
Section
65-1 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
the screen.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
play section) detection coordinates.
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
Section Operation panel section is displayed.
Operation/Procedure <Check target key>
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen. 7 Inch LCD model
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to 1
the simulation sub number entry menu. 2
3
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUDIT CLEAR
0
PROGRAM
CLEAR
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET
START (COLOR)
START (MONO)
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the Purpose Data output/Check
line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the
max.) image memory. (Confidential data are also
Section FAX outputted.)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the Operation/Procedure
right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.) 1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page. image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high- 2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal normal display.
display.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- 66-8
nals are sent. Purpose Operation test/Check
4) To end signal send: Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes-
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- sages to the line and the speaker. (Send
nal send is interrupted. level: Max.)
<Signal send table> Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the following
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
screen is displayed.
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33 2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17 highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t display.
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100 <Sound message table>
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2)
DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
(Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6)
66-5 ALARM (Alarm) RINGER EXT.TEL.RING
(Ringing sound ER (External
Purpose Operation test/Check
(Speaker)) telephone call)
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line
and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft
SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals,
refer to SIM66-04.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-05, the following
screen is displayed.
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
display.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.
4) To end signal send:
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
signal send is interrupted.
66-10
Purpose Data clear 66-13
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send Purpose Setting
image data. (The confidential data are also Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-
cleared.) 14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be
Section FAX registered.)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] button. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the following
screen is displayed.
3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the
machine. * The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)
2) Enter a number with 10-key.
66-11 The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:].
Purpose Operation test/Check After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
one digit))
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
Max.) 3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of
Section FAX [PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-11, the following
screen is displayed. 66-14
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is Purpose Adjustment
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS)
send test and to adjust the make time.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
sound message is sent. Section FAX
4) To end signal send: Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-14, the following
nal send is interrupted. screen is displayed.
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
<300bps send signal table>
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
010101 00001
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test Purpose Setting
and to adjust the send level. Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume.
Section FAX (This simulation can be executed even
though the handset setting is set to NO.
Operation/Procedure
When, however, the handset is not
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the following installed, the sound volume cannot be
screen is displayed. checked.) (Japan model only)
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
Section FAX
dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
group of the signal send level. Operation/Procedure
3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The button 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
the default sound volume.)
66-17 2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID-
DLE 2:MAX)
Purpose Operation test/Check
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume
and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
Section FAX 4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and deliv-
Operation/Procedure ery of the on-hold tone is stopped.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-17, the following
screen is displayed. 66-24
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and Purpose Data clear
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST save data.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
Section FAX
nals are sent.
Operation/Procedure
4) To stop signal sending:
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted. 2) Press [YES] button.
The FAST save data are cleared.
66-18 3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
Purpose Operation test/Check to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set-
ting)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the following
screen is displayed.
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.
4) To stop signal sending:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
66-62
trol installed in the FAX BOX.
Purpose Backup
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a
Operation/Procedure
USB memory in PDF file type.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted
and YES] and [NO] buttons become active. Section FAX
The power control program is rewritten. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com- 2) Select data to be imported.
pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed.
67-31
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are
cleared.
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.)
Mode Default
Item/Display Content
value
Black F1 Black : Light F2
(Achromatic F2 Black : Normal
MODE color) F3 Black : Dark
1
COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2
(Selected G2 Selected color : Normal
color) G3 Selected color : Dark
Black F1 Black : Light F2
(Achromatic F2 Black : Normal
MODE color) F3 Black : Dark
2
COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2
(Selected G2 Selected color : Normal
color) G3 Selected color : Dark
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer image filter and PCL/PS printer
trapping. Item/Display Content
Section Printer Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
Operation/Procedure Printer heavy paper automatic density
correction amount
1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. 600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
2) Enter the set value. SCREEN2 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
3) Press [OK] key. B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
Setting Default SCREEN9 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value Printer B/W toner save automatic density
A SHARPNESS: Color print 0-4 2 The greater correction amount
COLOR PRINT the set value GLOSSPAPER SCREEN10 (Glossy paper screen)
B SHARPNESS: Monochrome 0-4 2 is, the
B/W PRINT print stronger the
filer
enhancement
is. The smaller
the set value
is, the
stronger the
filter
smoothness
is.
(0: Soft High,
1: Soft Low, 2:
Center, 3:
Sharp Low, 4:
Sharp High)
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to adjust the color balance, the density, and
the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, and the 600dpi 1bit mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 1) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
Select item
Content
(Mode)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
Glossy Adjustment item to improve the color balance in glossy
paper mode
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬऔ the cause. કΩȜΜ۟¦༞ݯ
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Reset
໘ܦ
Standby
ఞેܥఠ state
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1
E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Error code and operatable mode
Operatable mode
Judg- Copy scan FAST
Scan-
Trouble content ment Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation to
HDD
tion) host
FAX board • FAX board MFP F6 (00, 01, 04, – – –
trouble breakdown 21, 30, 97, 98)
HDD trouble • SD card E7 (07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
• HDD breakdown E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• HDD-ASIC E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Scanner • SCU A0 (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
communication communication E7 (80)
trouble error
Engine • PCU A0 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
communication communication E7 (90)
trouble error
Printer port • Printer port F9 (91, 92) ✕ ✕ ✕ U
system trouble system trouble
Backup battery • Backup battery U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
voltage fall voltage fall
trouble
Operation • Controller fan L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 1 trouble
Operation • External serial I/F U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 2 communication
error (RIC)
• Memory error U2 (00, 05, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ U15
(included not 10, 11, 24, 40,
installed the 41, 42)
expansion RAM)
• Connection A0 (10, 11, 15, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (Model 16, 20)
data discrepancy) E7 (60, 61,
(MFPC detection) 65, 89)
• Serial number U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
data error
• HDD registration U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
data check sum
error
Operation • Memory check E7 (95, 96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 3 error when
booting
• Image memory E7 (01, 49, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble, decode 91, 92, 93, 94)
error
Operation • Personal counter PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 4 connection
trouble
Power controller • Power controller L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble error
Special function • Watermark data U2 (60)
trouble error P1 (00, 01,
02)
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 2
Operatable mode
Judg- Copy scan FAST
Scan-
Trouble content ment Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation to
HDD
tion) host
Laser trouble • LSU breakdown PCU E7 (20, 28, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
29) *10
L6 (10)
Engine trouble 1 • Connection A0 (21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (Model E7 (50, 55)
data discrepancy) F1 (50)
(PCU detection)
Engine trouble 2 • PCU troubles C1 (10, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(motor, fusing, C4 (00) *10
etc.) F2 (22, 40, 64,
70, 74, 91)
H2 (00, 01,
02, 03)
H3 (00, 01,
02)
H4 (00, 01,
02, 30)
H5 (01)
H7 (10, 11)
L4 (02, 03, 04,
05, 06, 11, 12,
16, 31, 32, 35,
43, 50, 51)
L8 (01, 02)
U2 (90, 91)
Process system • LSU/Process E7 (21, 22, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble system 23) *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *10
breakdown F2 (23, 24, 25, *19
41, 42, 43, 65,
66, 67, 71, 72,
73, 75, 76, 77,
92, 93, 94)
Paper feed tray 1 • Paper feed tray 1 F3 (12) U3 U3 U3 U3
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 2 • Paper feed tray 2 F3 (22) U3 U3 U3 U3
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 3 • Paper feed tray 3 U6 (01) U3 U3 U3 U3
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 4 • Paper feed tray 4 U6 (02) U3 U3 U3 U3
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray • Paper feed tray U6 (00, 10, U11 U11 U11 U11
other troubles other breakdown 50, 52) *10
Staple trouble • Staple breakdown F1 (08, 10) U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4
*10
Finisher trouble • After-process F1 (00, 03, 15, U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4
breakdown 19, 20, 33, 34, *10
37)
Other troubles • Other troubles EE (EC, EL,
EU)
Process control • Process control F2 (39, 49, 50,
trouble breakdown (PCU 51, 58, 78) *12
detection)
Operation • Connection SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble trouble (Model
data discrepancy)
(SCU detection)
SCU CPT ASIC • SCU CPT ASIC UC (02) U9 U9 U9 U9 U9
trouble error
SCU ASIC • SCU ASIC error UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (SCU (SCU detection)
detection)
Scanner trouble • SCU EEPROM U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1 error
Scanner trouble • Scanner section L1 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 breakdown L3 (00)
(mirror motor,
lens, copy lamp)
CCD trouble • CCD breakdown E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(shading, etc.)
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 3
Error where only history data are saved
Operatable mode
Judg- Copy scan FAST
Scan-
Trouble content ment Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
Error history PCU F2 (45)
(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
F3-12, 22 Saved in the PCU
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 4
Process sequence Error code Content
U2 60 Watermark check error
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
24 User authentication counter check sum error
First 10 User authentication index check sum error
(Low priority) A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
n
U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
p
E7 48 Scanner expansion PWB ASIC memory error
Last 42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
(High priority) 96 MFPC PWB DRAM memory check error (MFPC PWB)
95 SoC DRAM memory check error (PRINTER section)
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) ROM error
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 5
F. Error code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP
10 Color profile error MFP
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFP
16 Data error of the energy-saving NIC controller firmware in the SD card MFP
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU
C1 10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) PCU
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU
C4 00 PTC trouble (TC high voltage trouble) PCU
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP
03 HDD trouble MFP
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP
07 SD card error MFP
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU
20 LSU laser detection error (K) PCU
21 LSU laser detection error (C) PCU
22 LSU laser detection error (M) PCU
23 LSU laser detection error (Y) PCU
28 LSU - PCU connection error PCU
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU
49 Water Mark data error MFP
50 Combination error between PWB and firmware (PCU PWB detection) PCU
55 PCU PWB information sum error PCU
60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection) MFP
61 Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the PCU PWB MFP
(MFPC PWB detection)
65 MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP
80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error MFP
89 Communication error between MFPC PWB CPU and energy-saving NIC MFP
controller
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP
91 FAX reception image data error MFP
92 Copy image data error MFP
93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error MFP
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP
95 SoC DRAM memory check error MFP
96 MFPC PWB memory check error MFP
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error PCU
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU
10 Staple operation trouble PCU
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU
34 Punch operation trouble PCU
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 6
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU
40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) PCU
41 Toner density sensor trouble (C) PCU
42 Toner density sensor trouble (M) PCU
43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y) PCU
45 Color image density sensor trouble PCU
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU
51 CL drum phase sensor trouble PCU
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU
64 Toner supply operation trouble (K) PCU
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) PCU
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) PCU
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) PCU
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y) PCU
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) PCU
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) PCU
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) PCU
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) PCU
78 Registration image density sensor trouble PCU
(Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality)
91 High density process control high voltage error (K) PCU
92 High density process control high voltage error (C) PCU
93 High density process control high voltage error (M) PCU
94 High density process control high voltage error (Y) PCU
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU
F6 00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble MFP
01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error FAX
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX
21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch MFP
30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection) MFP
97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine MFP
98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main MFP
machine destination
F9 91 Communication error between MFP and the printer section when booting MFP
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU
03 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD1) PCU
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM_AD2) PCU
11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_LM) PCU
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU
04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) PCU
05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) PCU
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU
11 Shift motor trouble PCU
12 Secondary transfer separation trouble PCU
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 7
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
L4 30 MFP fan motor trouble MPF
31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU
43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble PCU
50 Process fan trouble PCU
51 Process fan 2 trouble PCU
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU
02 Full wave signal error PCU
20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/LSU mother board MFP
P1 00 PCI communication error MFP
01 PCI fan error MFP
02 Plasma generating device error MFP
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP
05 HDD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP
05 Erroneous detection of account management data / HDD internal MFP
authentication DB table error
10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP
11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP
24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP
40 SD card system storage data area error MFP
41 HDD system storage data area error MFP
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP
60 Watermark check error MFP
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU
U6 00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper feed tray 3, 4) communication trouble PCU
01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble PCU
02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble PCU
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU
52 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper feed tray 2) communication trouble PCU
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP
51 Vendor machine error MFP
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 8
G. Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-16 Data error of the energy-saving NIC
controller firmware in the SD card
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content Data error of the energy-saving NIC controller
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by firmware in the SD card.
interruption of the power during the version-up Detail MFP
operation, etc.
Cause SD card trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
Check & Remedy Reinstall the firmware.
procedure again.
Replace the SD card.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (MFP)
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up Detail MFP
operation, etc. Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
SCU PWB trouble. the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
procedure again.
Replace the SCU PWB.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (PCU)
A0-10 Color profile error
Trouble content
Trouble content Color profile error Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal. the EEPROM data version.
Combination error between the MFPC PWB firmware Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
and the color profile
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively.
Replace the MFPC PWB. A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (SCU)
A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency
(MFP - PCU) Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
Trouble content
the EEPROM data version.
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the PCU.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up C1-10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome)
mode.
Trouble content
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly.
firmware There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (BK).
The developer unit (KCMY) is not installed properly.
Trouble content There is an abnormality in the developer unit
Detail MFP (KCMY).
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
with a security kit enable. connector.
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware. Breakage of the high voltage harness.
High voltage MC PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check the output of the developing bias with SIM8-1.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the developer unit./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector./Replace.
Replace the high voltage MC PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 9
C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color) E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
Trouble content
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)
Detail PCU
Cause The PTC unit is not installed properly./Trouble. Trouble content
The primary transfer unit is not installed properly./ Detail SCU
Trouble. Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
The secondary transfer unit is not installed properly./ scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Trouble. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
High voltage TC PWB trouble. CCD unit abnormality.
PCU PWB trouble. SCU PWB abnormality.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit. Check the CCD unit.
Replace the primary transfer unit. Check the SCU PWB.
Replace the secondary transfer unit.
Check disconnection of the high voltage TC PWB
connector./Replace. E7-11 Shading error (White correction)
Replace the high voltage TC PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
E7-01 MFP image data error Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Trouble content Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Detail MFP Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB. Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble. CCD unit abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness SCU PWB abnormality.
of the MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
unit.
Check or replace the scanner lamp.
E7-03 HDD trouble Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.
Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white board.
Trouble content Check or replace the CCD unit.
Detail MFP Check or replace the SCU PWB.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC
PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
(FAT breakage).
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness Trouble content
of the MFPC PWB and HDD. Detail SCU
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the Cause SCU PWB trouble.
HDD. Improper Installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Replace the HDD. CCD unit abnormality.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. SCU PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check or replace the CCD unit.
Check or replace the SCU PWB.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 10
E7-20 LSU laser detection error (K) E7-28 LSU - PCU connection error
Trouble content
Detail PCU E7-49 Water Mark data error
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble. Trouble content
LSU harness, connector trouble Detail MFP
LSU trouble Cause Watermark data trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. HDD trouble.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Check connection of the LSU harness. Replace the HDD.
Replace the LSU.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 11
E7-60 Combination error between PWB and E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error
firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
MFPC PWB trouble.
machine specifications is detected in the MFPC
PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC
MFPC PWB trouble. PWB.
Check the ground.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 12
E7-94 Image file data process error (when EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
importing file data) error (Under toner)
Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
importing filing data adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is
Detail MFP 51 or less.
Cause Image data process abnormality Detail PCU
HDD trouble Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Image compression data corruption Developing unit trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
DIMM memory trouble or contact error Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Replace the developing unit.
the memory. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
error
E7-95 SoC DRAM memory check error
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Soc DRAM memory access trouble
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Detail MFP
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Cause Memory data curruption occure
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Memory device trouble or contact error
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
the memory.
Replace MFP PWB finisher and the PCU PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
E7-96 MFPC PWB memory check error
F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
Trouble content MFPC PWB memory access trouble
Detail MFP
operation trouble
Cause Memory data curruption occure
Memory device trouble or contact error Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of Detail PCU
the memory. Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
Replace MFP PWB Harness and connector connection trouble
Home position sensor trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
error roller lift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
adjustment is outside of 128 r10. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Detail PCU Replace the home position sensor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
error (Over toner) Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density motor.
adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208 Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
or above. position sensor.
Detail PCU Replace the stapler shift motor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Developing unit trouble. Replace the home position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 13
F1-10 Staple operation trouble F1-21 Finisher fan trouble
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 14
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (K)
Trouble content The lamp is kept open for 1 sec from turning on the Trouble content
discharge lamp. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K) Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
and the PCU PWB. Developing unit trouble.
Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K). Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Check the harness and the connector. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content The lamp is kept open for 1 sec from turning on the
F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble (M)
discharge lamp.
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB Detail PCU
(M) and the PCU PWB. Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M). PCU PWB trouble.
Check the harness and the connector. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
Replace the developing unit.
F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content The lamp is kept open for 1 sec from turning on the
discharge lamp.
F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y)
Detail PCU
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (Y) Trouble content
and the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble. Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
PCU PWB trouble. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y). Developing unit trouble.
Check the harness and the connector. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Check connection of the process thermistor harness
and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 15
F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble
(HUD_M/TH_M)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment Detail PCU
trouble.
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Color image density sensor trouble.
Process humidity sensor harness and connector
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble.
connection trouble
Image density sensor dirt.
PCU PWB trouble.
Calibration plate dirt.
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Transfer unit lift operation trouble
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
PCU PWB trouble.
harness and the connector.
Check & Remedy Replace the color image density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the sensor harness and the
connector.
Clean the image density sensor.
Replace the calibration plate.
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (K)
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Replace the PCU PWB. Trouble content
Use SIM44-2 to perform the sensitivity adjustment of Detail PCU
the process control sensor. Cause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Trouble content Developing unit trouble.
Toner transport pipe section trouble
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Cause The LSU temperature is outside of -28qC - 78qC.
Replace the toner density sensor.
LSU thermistor trouble.
Connector and harness check.
LSU thermistor harness and connector connection
Replace the PCU PWB.
trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the developing unit.
LSU control PWB trouble.
Check the toner transport pipe section.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LSU.
F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C)
F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
Cause Toner motor trouble.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
Toner density sensor trouble.
connection trouble
Connector/harness trouble.
Drum drive section trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_CL". Developing unit trouble.
Replace the drum phase sensor. Toner transport pipe section trouble
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
and the connector.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Repair the drum drive section.
Connector and harness check.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
Check the toner transport pipe section.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 16
F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)
Trouble content
F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Detail PCU and toner cartridge
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Replace the PCU PWB.
specification.) Check the connector and the harness between the
Toner cartridge trouble. PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 17
F2-78 Registration image density F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
sensor trouble (Transfer belt
substrate reflection rate abnormality) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
Trouble content
CLUD1 sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor PCU PWB trouble.
sensitivity adjustment trouble). Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Image density (resist) sensor connector and harness of LUD1.
connection trouble Replace the lift-up unit.
Image density (registration) sensor dirt. Replace the PCU PWB.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the image density (resist) sensor.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor. Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Clean or replace the transfer belt. Detail PCU
Use SIM44-2 to perform the sensibility adjustment of Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
the process control sensor. CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-91 High density process control high Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
voltage error (K) Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Replace the lift-up unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content For the production process (Not occur in the market.)
Detail PCU
Cause — F6-00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication
Check & Remedy — trouble
F2-92 High density process control high Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error /
Framing / Parity / Protocol error
voltage error (C) Section MFP
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble.
Trouble content For the production process (Not occur in the market.) Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Detail PCU and
Cause — Remedy
Check & Remedy — Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and
harness trouble
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
F2-93 High density process control high and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Remedy
voltage error (M)
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and
harness trouble
Trouble content For the production process (Not occur in the market.) Check Check the connector and the harness between the
Detail PCU and FAX control PWB and the mother board.
Cause — Remedy
Check & Remedy — Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
and
F2-94 High density process control high Remedy
voltage error (Y)
F6-01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write
Trouble content For the production process (Not occur in the market.)
error
Detail PCU
Cause —
Check & Remedy — Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and
write)
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
Remedy
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 18
F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX
control PWB destination and the main
Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble machine destination
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
destination and the main machine destination
and
Section MFP
remedy
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information
Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6)
and
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
Remedy
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
Remedy
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 19
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Trouble content Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Detail PCU Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Replace the HL control PWB.
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Fusing unit not installed
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature
Replace the PCU PWB. trouble (TH_US)
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Trouble content
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble
H2-03 Thermistor open trouble PCU PWB trouble
(TH_UM_AD1) Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
HL control PWB trouble
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Detail PCU
heater lamp.
Cause Thermistor trouble
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermistor.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Fusing unit not installed
harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
Check the connector in the fusing section. trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature level within the specified time from turning ON the
trouble (TH_UM) power relay.
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Trouble content
Heater lamp trouble.
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermostat trouble.
Thermistor trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
HL control PWB trouble.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Power unit trouble.
HL control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp. heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the Replace the thermostat.
harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
HL control PWB trouble
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 20
H4-01 Fusing section low temperature H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
trouble (TH_LM) (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the level within the specified time from stopping a job due
power relay. to fall in the fusing temperature.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL control PWB trouble. HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the heater lamp.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Replace the PCU PWB.
heater lamp. Replace the thermostat.
Replace the thermistor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the heater lamp. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the power unit.
Replace the thermostat. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Check connection of the connector and the harness. heater lamp.
Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit.
H7-11 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
(TH_LM)
H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_US) Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from stopping a job due
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified to fall in the fusing temperature.
level within the specified time from turning ON the Detail PCU
power relay. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Detail PCU Heater lamp trouble.
Cause Thermistor trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Thermostat trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Thermostat trouble. HL control PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Power unit trouble.
HL control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Power unit trouble. Replace the heater lamp.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the thermostat.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Check connection of the connector and the harness.
heater lamp. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the thermistor. Replace the power unit.
Replace the heater lamp. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Replace the PCU PWB. heater lamp.
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL control PWB. L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
Replace the power unit.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 21
L3-00 Scanner return trouble L4-05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR)
Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
time. the developing motor.
Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause Scanner unit trouble Cause Developing motor trouble
SCU PWB trouble Developing motor harness and connector connection
Scanner control PWB trouble trouble
Harness and connector connection trouble PCU PWB trouble
Scanner home position sensor trouble Developing unit trouble
Scanner motor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. developing motor.
Replace the scanner unit. Replace the developing motor.
Replace the SCU PWB. Check connection of the developing motor harness
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. and the connection.
Replace the scanner home position sensor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the scanner motor. Replace the developing motor.
Replace the developing unit.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 22
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
L4-12 Secondary transfer separation trouble Replace the power cooling fan.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content A change in the separation sensor status cannot be Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
detected within the specified time in separation
operation of the secondary transfer.
Detail PCU L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble
Cause Secondary transfer separation mechanism trouble.
Secondary transfer separation clutch trouble. Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
Secondary transfer separation sensor trouble. Detail PCU
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Cause Fusing cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check or repair the secondary transfer separation Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
mechanism.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the secondary transfer separation clutch.
Replace the fusing cooling fan.
Replace the secondary transfer separation sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 23
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error P1-01 PCI fan error
Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected. Trouble content
Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause PCU PWB trouble. Cause The PCI fan operation signal is not detected.
Power unit trouble. PCI fan trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. PCI control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness
Replace the power unit. between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check the PCI fan, and replace if necessary.
L8-02 Full wave signal error
P1-00 PCI communication error Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fall
Detail MFP
Trouble content Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
Detail MFP 2) Battery circuit abnormality
Cause Communication error between the MFPC PWB and Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
the PCI. and 2.5V or above.
Connection failure of connectors and harness Remedy Replace the battery.
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.
MFPC PWB trouble.
PCI control PWB trouble. U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connectors
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI. Trouble content
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Detail MFP
(Refer to the necessary procedures after replacement
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
of the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
EEPROM socket contact trouble
perform the procedures.)
MFPC PWB trouble
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
Strong external noises.
necessary.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
Check the power environment.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 24
U2-05 HDD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB
inconsistency manufacturing No. data inconsistency
Trouble content The HDD or the MFPC PWB installed is improper. Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
(Erroneous detection of account management data) in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause The HDD was replaced. Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB,
The MFPC PWB was replaced. the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
HDD trouble replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after PCU PWB trouble
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Manual, and perform the works.) Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
on the new PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
U2-10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
index check sum error perform the works.)
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication U2-40 SD card system storage data area
basic data) check sum error. error
MFPC PWB SRAM trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Strong external noises. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Detail MFP
(Index information data in the HDD are transferred to Cause A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data
the SRAM.) partition.
Replace the MFPC PWB. SD card trouble
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after MFPC PWB trouble
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the
perform the works.) HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is
automatically booted.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
U2-11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
sum error
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
Detail MFP
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
MFPC PWB trouble
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
Strong external noises.
machine adjustment values in the SD card.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
HDD trouble
data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
MFPC PWB trouble
EEPROM.)
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures
perform the works.)
of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause MFPC PWB SRAM trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The check sum error
detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)
Replace the MFPC PWB.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 25
U2-42 Machine adjustment data (system U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
storage data area) error
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail SCU
Detail MFP Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
SCU PWB trouble
Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is
broken. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system Replace the SCU PWB.
saved data area are broken. Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.
HDD trouble Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
MFPC PWB trouble items, and adjust again if they are improper.
SD card trouble • Scanner-related adjustments
• Touch panel-related adjustments
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the
SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card
replacement." Trouble content
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the
Detail SCU
adjustment values.
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
SCU PWB trouble.
U2-50 HDD*1 user authentication data check EEPROM socket contact trouble.
sum error Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Trouble content
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
Detail MFP error detection data are calculated again to reset the
Cause HDD trouble*1 proper check sum data.)
MFPC PWB trouble
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
(address book, image send system registration data
(senders record, meta data)) and register again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Trouble content
Replace the HDD*1. Detail PCU
Replace the MFPC PWB. Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after PCU PWB trouble
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service EEPROM socket contact trouble
Manual, and perform the works.)*1 Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
*1: SD card when no HDD is installed. adjust again if they are improper.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
U2-60 Watermark check error Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Cause Watermark data trouble
HDD trouble Trouble content
MFPC PWB trouble Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the HDD. EEPROM socket contact trouble
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after Replace the PCU PWB.
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Manual, and perform the works.) Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
error detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 26
U6-00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper U6-52 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper
feed tray 3, 4) communication trouble feed tray 2) communication trouble
Trouble content Trouble content Paper feed tray 2 (desk unit) is not recognized.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Cause Connection failure between the machine and paper
Paper feed desk control PWB trouble feed tray 2 (desk unit)
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the paper feed desk control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content D2ULD does not turn ON within the specified time U7-51 Vendor machine error
when lift-up operation.
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause D2ULD sensor trouble Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Desk control PWB trouble
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Lift unit trouble Connector, harness connection trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
PCU PWB trouble
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Check & Remedy Replace the D2ULD sensor. Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Check the connector and the harness in the
Replace the lift unit.
communication line.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB.
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error
U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport
Trouble content
motor trouble
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. (CPT-ASIC trouble.)
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor rpm
abnormality, over-current to the motor). UC-20 DOCC ASIC error
Desk control PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk Trouble content
transport motor. Detail SCU
Replace the desk control PWB. Cause SCU PWB trouble. (DOCC-ASIC trouble.)
Replace the desk paper feed motor. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
desk.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
Replace the desk control PWB.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 27
(1) Descriptions on E7-91 - 94 errors
Two-digit numbers with double parentheses are added to E7-91 - 94 error codes recorded in SIM22-6 indicate the detailed contents of the
errors.
The number in each digit has its own meaning.
(Example) E7-91(**)
The upper digit of the added code indicates the job kind at the occurrence of the error.
The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executed
when the abnormality is detected.
: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error.
: Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc.
—: Added code without generating
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 28
(2) Countermeasures in case of E7-91 - 94 (3) Countermeasures against the case where nothing
In case of E7-9x (11), E7-9x (21), E7-9x (31), E7-9x (41) is displayed when the machine is booted
[Trouble content]
Cause In case of E7-91 - 94, the DIMM memory (DRAM) is
If nothing is displayed when the machine is booted, the error code
automatically read/written to perform a simplified
check. If an abnormality is detected in that case, the cannot be checked and the cause is hard to identify.
added code becomes (*1). One of the causes may be an abnormality in the boot program of
Therefore, there is a strong possibility that an the SD card. To check that, the following method is used.
abnormality lies around the memory.
Check and remedy • Check the installing state of the DIMM memory
[Check method]
and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no
abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM Check to confirm that the LED (red) under the CPU heat sink on the
memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure MFPC PWB shown in the figure below is lighted when the power is
that there is no error occurring again.) supplied.
• Use SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to If the LED is lighted, it is judged as an abnormality of the SD card.
check to insure that no error occurs.
• Replace the DIMM memory.
• Replace the MFPC PWB.
3$ #ARD
Cause Mostly because the data inputted to the ASIC for 2ED ,%$
decoding are broken for some reasons.
There is an abnormality in the process of read/write [Countermeasures]
of the process data in the memory or the hard disk.
1) Replace the SD card with a new one. (Be sure to use a service
A great noise unexpectedly generated may be the
part.)
cause.
For the cases of FAX or Internet FAX reception data, 2) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
when broken data are saved, printing is performed 3) Use SIIM66-62 to backup the FAX reception data from the
every time when the machine is booted, generating HDD to a USB memory device. (If there is no FAX reception
an error repeatedly. (E7-91)
data, this procedure is not required.) (The FAX reception data
(To clear the received data, execute SIM66-10.)
are backed up in the PDF format. Supply the date to the user.)
Check and remedy • Check the DIMM memory, the MFPC PWB, and
the HDD to insure that there is no abnormality. 4) Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX and image send memory.
• When the job at occurrence of an error is FAX (Ensure consistency between the HDD data and the image
(E7-91), check the installing state of the FAX related memory.)
control PWB and the SC CARD PWB.
• Perform SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to
insure that there is no NG.
• Perform SIM62-02 and SIM62-03 (HDD read/
write check) to insure that there is no NG. (It is not
required, however, when the job at occurrence of
an error is FAX.)
• Check the installing state of the DIMM memory
and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no
abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM
memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure
that there is no error occurring again.)
• Replace the HDD.
• Replace the FAX control PWB.
• Replace the DIMM memory.
• Replace the MFPC PWB.
• Replace the SD card.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 29
(4) Relation between the MFPC PWB LED status and
errors
When the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the
MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause.
<Process content and LED display>
LED status Cause for halt during
Process operation content
(Lighting) operation
CPU initial setting Reus ASIC trouble
Memory adjustment Memory and its
peripheral circuit trouble
Memory check Memory and its
peripheral circuit trouble
– –
Program memory development Memory-related trouble
Interruption-related initialization Reus ASIC trouble
PCIe initialization PCIe and its peripheral
circuit trouble (SoC, etc.)
Basic device initialization Reus ASIC trouble
SD card initialization Reus ASIC trouble
SATA initialization SD card trouble
HDD trouble
OS initialization (1) Reus ASIC trouble
Timer enabling Reus ASIC trouble
Serial driver enabling Reus ASIC trouble
I2C driver enabling
LCD initialization Reus ASIC trouble
Image process IP initialization Reus ASIC trouble
OS initialization (2) Reus ASIC trouble
Main process Reus ASIC trouble
LED No D25/D24/D23/D22
3 / 2 / 1 / 0
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 30
2. JAM and troubleshooting
A. JAM code list
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 31
JAM detection method JAM
Basic JAM margin
detection
JAM code JAM content distance (A) distance (B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition distance
[mm] [mm]
(A+B) [mm]
CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 OFF 89.2 65.0 154.2
(Desk lower stage feed paper) end command from DESK
(The final roller position of
DSEK)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM CPFD1 OFF PPD1 OFF 149.9 65.0 214.9
(Main cassette paper)
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM CPFD1 OFF PPD1 OFF 149.9 65.0 214.9
(Main cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM CPFD1 OFF PPD1 OFF 149.9 65.0 214.9
(Desk upper stage feed paper)
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM CPFD1 OFF PPD1 OFF 149.9 65.0 214.9
(Desk lower stage feed paper)
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM PPD1 ON PPD1 OFF Sub scan 65.0 Sub scan
(Manual feed tray feed paper) size size
–9 –9 + 65
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM APPD2 OFF PPD1 OFF 131.1 65.0 196.1
(ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed PPD1 OFF 179.1 65.0 244.1
(LCC refeed paper) end command from LCC
(LPFD OFF)
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 62.9 65.0 127.9
(Main cassette feed paper)
PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 62.9 65.0 127.9
(Main cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 62.9 65.0 127.9
(Desk upper stage feed paper)
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 62.9 65.0 127.9
(Desk lower stage feed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 61.4 65.0 126.4
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 61.4 65.0 126.4
(ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 62.9 65.0 127.9
(LCC feed paper)
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM PPD2 OFF POD1 OFF 297.6 65.0 362.6
POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM POD1 OFF POD2 OFF 90.2 65.0 155.2
(When left paper exit)
POD2 remaining JAM Reversing start POD2 OFF after starting Sub scan 65.0 Sub scan
(When ADU reversing) reversing size size
–60.6 –60.6 + 65
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM POD2 OFF after starting POD3 OFF 68.9 65.0 133.9
reversing
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM POD2 OFF after starting APPD1 OFF 111.0 65.0 176.0
reversing
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM APPD1 OFF APPD2 OFF 228.8 65.0 293.8
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM Transmission of the Reception time-out of the — — —
(Image preparation wait time- IMAGE_PREPARE command END_IMAGE_PREPARE
out) to ICU command from ICU (50 sec)
CPFD2_ CPFD2 JAM Transmission of the Reception time-out of the — — —
DESK (Desk communication preliminary paper feed request preliminary paper feed start
abnormality detection) command to DESK command from DESK (30 sec)
Reception of the preliminary Reception time-out of the — — —
paper feed start command preliminary paper feed end
from DESK command from DESK (30 sec)
Transmission of the paper Reception time-out of the — — —
feed request command to paper feed start command
DESK from DESK (30 sec)
Reception of the paper feed Reception time-out of the — — —
start command from DESK paper feed end command
from DESK (30 sec)
PPD1_LCC PPD1 JAM Transmission of the Reception time-out of the — — —
(LCC communication preliminary paper feed request preliminary paper feed start
abnormality detection) command to LCC command from LCC (30 sec)
Reception of the preliminary Reception time-out of the — — —
paper feed start command preliminary paper feed end
from LCC command from LCC (30 sec)
Transmission of the paper Reception time-out of the — — —
feed request command to paper feed start command
LCC from LCC (30 sec)
Reception of the paper feed Reception time-out of the — — —
start command from LCC paper feed end command
from LCC (30 sec)
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 32
JAM detection method JAM
Basic JAM margin
detection
JAM code JAM content distance (A) distance (B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition distance
[mm] [mm]
(A+B) [mm]
PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM Transmission of the paper Reception time-out of the — — —
(Finisher communication attribute data command to paper interval data command
abnormality detection) FINISHER from FINISHER (30 sec)
(1) RSPF
(2) Desk
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 33
JAM detection method
JAM code JAM content
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) D1PPD ON D1PPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) D2PPD OFF D1PPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) D2PPD ON D2PPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
TRAY4 Casette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM D2PFC ON (Paper feed start) D2PPD does not turn ON within the specified time.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 34
3. Image send communication report code
A. Outline and code system descriptions B. Details
After completion of communication, the communication report (1) Communication report main code
table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
described on the communication report column. Report Final receive signal
Final receive signal (Receive side)
The communication report code is composed as follows: code (Send side)
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
Communication report: XX (XXXX)
1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
Communication report code of 00 – 99 (Refer to communication
3 FTT EOP
report main code.)
4 MCF EOM
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code: 5 PIP, PIN MPS
Used by the serviceman. 6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to 7 No signal, DCN DCN
communication report sub code 1.) 8 PPR PPS-EOP
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to 9 PPS-EOM
communication report sub code 2.) 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
11 RNR RR
12 CTR CTC
13 ERR EOR-Q
The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2 are in hexa-
14 PPS-PRI-Q
decimal notation. (The others are in decimal notation.)
16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the these mod- 19 FTT PPS-EOP
els. 20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
30 V.8 Phase-2 V.8 Phase-2
31 V.8 Phase-3 V.8 Phase-3
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0 – 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 35
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 36
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
• Header acquisition error.
• Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
• The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
• There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Cannot be stored in memory.
• The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
• Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
• The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
• An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
• An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
• Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.
*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
• When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
• Errors in ( ) are not used.
(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always
indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 37
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used —
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used —
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the Resend
upper limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.) OSAScanToFTP
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
83 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Endian error
84 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Version error
85 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag data error
86 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag parameter error
87 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Header size error
88 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.
When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."
4. Dial tone
When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this machine,
be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.
Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the
buzzer sound.)
If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 38
MX-3115N
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired. When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine. Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
* The number of key changes according to the number of the 6 (
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&803&806&8%
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
the firmware.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-XXXX
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.
)-!'% 3%.$
,).%
$!4!
53" PORT
Firm Update
> F 0100P000.sfu
Firm Update
Reading Data
B. Counter reset
When a part or consumable part is replaced with new one in the
maintenance, execute SIM24 to reset the following counters.
1) Maintenance counter
2) Each consumable part counter
3) Each unit counter
4) Trouble counter, JAM counter
D. Confirmation, adjustment
After completion of part replacement and cleaning, etc, execute the following procedures.
Items necessary to execute
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the messages
and the counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A Enable/
Counter name Counter value
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: TA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
Maintenance required. Code: CA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Color) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: CA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
Maintenance required. Code: AA 0 (Print continue) Both of total and color When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: AA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
D. Fusing unit
Display condition Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A SIM26-38-B Enable/
Counter name Counter value
set value set value Disable
Maintenance required.: FK1 0 (Print continue) – Fusing belt print counter When 200K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) –
Maintenance required.: FK2 0 (Print continue) – Pressure roller print counter When 200K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) –
Maintenance required.: FK3 – 0 (Print continue) Fusing web print counter When 200K is reached. Enable
– 1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required.: FK3 (Pop-up) – 0 (Print continue) Fusing web print counter When Web end detection is ON. Enable
– 1 (Print stop) Disable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, the fusing belt counter, the fusing web print counter,
the accumulated rotation number counter, and the use day counter.
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
E. OPC drum
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance required.: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) When 840K rotation is Enable
1 (Print stop) or reached
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter (K) 26cpm machine :
When 140K is reached.
31cpm machine :
When 155K is reached
Maintenance required.: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) When 840K rotation is
1 (Print stop) or reached
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter 26/31cpm machine :
(C/M/Y) When 140K is reached.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
F. Developer
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance required.: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) When 840K rotation is Enable
1 (Print stop) or reached
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter (K) 26cpm machine :
When 140K is reached.
31cpm machine :
When 155K is reached
Maintenance required.: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) When 840K rotation is
1 (Print stop) or reached
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter 26/31cpm machine :
(C/M/Y) When 140K is reached.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the developer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears.
H. Toner
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
(K/C/M/Y) Prepare a toner No relation Toner motor rotation time Specified time of rotations Enable
(Near near end)
(K/C/M/Y) Toner supply is low No relation Toner supply amount is decreasing. ATC sensor output variation Enable
(Near end)
Replace the toner cartridge. (K) 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count (Disable for a JOB which
(End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value. requires K toner)
Replace the toner cartridge. 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Enable for monochrome,
(C/M/Y) (End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value. Disable for color
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
3. Maintenance list
Main unit
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean S: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Section/
Parts work When 840 K 840 K 840 K
Unit work Section name Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling rotation rotation rotation
sequence
1 Developing Developing unit 1 Developer ✕ S S S Replace as needed.
section (monochrome) 2 DV seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 DV side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
4 Toner filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Bias pin ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Connector ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Developing unit 1 Developer ✕ S S S
(color) 2 DV seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 DV side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
4 Toner filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Bias pin ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Connector ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 OPC drum OPC drum unit 1 Drum ✕ S S S 840K rotation or
section (monochrome) 2 MC unit ✕ S S S
26cpm machine
3 Cleaning blade ✕ S S S maximum printable
number 140K
4 Toner reception ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
blade 31cpm machine
5 Side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ maximum printable
F/R number 155K
6 Charger ✕ S S S
cleaner
OPC drum unit 1 Drum ✕ S S S 840K rotation or
(color) maximum printable num-
2 MC unit ✕ S S S
ber 140K
3 Cleaning blade ✕ S S S
4 Toner reception ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
blade
5 Side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
6 Charger ✕ S S S
cleaner
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit work Section name Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
sequence
1 RSPF RSPF unit 1 Document – – Replace at 100K of the
section pickup roller SPF paper feed counter
or 1 year of use.
2 Paper feed – – When replacing the paper
roller feed roller, apply grease
3 Separation – – to the paper feed shaft.
roller GP-501MR
4 Torque ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace at 400K of the
limiter SPF SPF paper feed counter
or 2 years of use.
5 Take-up ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
torque
limiter
6 Discharge ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
brush
7 Registration – –
roller
8 Transport – –
roller 2
9 Transport – –
roller 3
10 Paper exit – –
roller
11 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
12 Scan plate – –
13 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
14 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
15 OC mat – –
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 4
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit work Section name Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
sequence
2 Scanner Scanner unit 1 Drive belt ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
section 2 Drive wire ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
3 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
4 Rails ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩
5 Mirror – –
6 Reflector – –
7 Scanner – –
lamp
8 Lens – –
9 CCD – –
10 Table glass – –
11 SPF glass – –
3 Transfer Primary 1 Separation ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
section transfer unit pawl
2 Primary ✕ S – S S S – S S When replacing, apply
transfer belt KYNAR powder.
3 Secondary ✕ – –
drive
transmission
gear
4 Primary ✕ – –
transfer belt
drive roller
5 Primary – – –
transfer belt
follower
roller
6 Primary ✕ – –
transfer belt
tension
roller
7 Registration ✕ – –
backup
roller
8 Y auxiliary ✕ – –
roller
9 PTC backup ✕ – –
roller
10 Primary ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
transfer
roller
11 Transfer ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
cleaner
seals F/R
12 Primary ✕ S – S S S – S S
transfer belt
cleaner
blade
13 Primary ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
transfer
toner
reception
blade
14 Primary ✕ – –
transfer
operation
mode
detector
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 5
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit work Section name Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
sequence
3 Transfer Secondary 1 Secondary ✕ – – – –
section transfer unit transfer belt
follower
roller
2 Secondary ✕ – S – S – S – S Never use alcohol or
transfer belt solvents for cleaning.
Replace at every 360K.
3 Secondary ✕ – – – –
transfer belt
drive roller
4 Secondary ✕ – – – –
transfer
backup
roller
5 Secondary ✕ – – – –
transfer belt
tension
roller
6 Secondary ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ Replace as needed.
transfer
roller
7 Secondary ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕
transfer
drive gear
8 Separation ✕ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ When replacing, apply
cam HANARL FL-955R to the
shaft section.
9 Secondary ✕ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩
transfer
frame
4 Other Other 1 PTC unit ✕ S – S S S – S S Replace. Reciprocate the
PTC cleaning rod back
and forth 3 times.
2 Image ✕ – – Remove dirt from the light
density emitting/receiving
sections (transparent
sensor/
plastic sections) of the
Registration sensor and the standard
sensor/ reflection plate (gray
Standard plastic section) with dry
reflection waste cloth. *1
plate
5 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof – – Use the LSU cleaning rod.
glass
Other 2 Cleaning ✕ Attached to the waste
base toner box. (2 pcs.) /
Replace when the waste
toner box is replaced, or
at 100K, or 2 years of use.
6 Manual Manual paper 1 Paper feed ✕ – – Replace at 100K of the
paper feed feed unit roller manual paper feed
counter or 1 year of use.
section 2 Separation ✕ – –
roller
3 Torque ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
limiter
4 Transport ✕ – –
roller 9
5 Transport ✕ – –
roller 10
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
– Paper – – Clean with alcohol.
guides
7 Tray paper Tray paper 1 Paper ✕ – – Replace at 100K of the
feed section feed unit pickup roller tray paper feed counter or
1 year of use.
2 Paper feed ✕ – –
roller
3 Separation ✕ – –
roller
4 Transport ✕ – –
roller 4
5 Transport ✕ – –
roller 2
6 Torque ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
limiter
7 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
– Paper – – Clean with alcohol.
guides
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 6
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit work Section name Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
sequence
8 Paper PS unit 1 Registration ✕ – –
registration roller (idle)
section 2 Registration ✕ – –
(paper roller (drive)
transport 3 Transport ✕ – –
section)/ roller 5
Paper exit 4 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
section/ADU
Right door unit 5 Transport ✕ – –
section
roller 7
6 Transport ✕ – –
roller 8
7 Paper exit ✕ – –
roller 3
8 Paper exit ✕ – –
roller 2
9 Discharge ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
brush
10 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Fusing rear 11 Transport ✕ – –
unit roller 6
Paper exit unit 12 Paper exit ✕ – –
roller 1
13 Discharge ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
brush
14 Sensors – ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Other 15 Paper dust – –
removing
unit
– Paper – – Clean with alcohol.
guides
9 Drive Main drive unit 1 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified
section Belt drive unit (grease) position when checking.
FLOIL G-313S
2 Shafts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
(grease)
3 Shaft earth ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified
sections position when checking.
FLOIL GE-676
(conduction
grease)
4 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
5 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Transport 6 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
drive unit 7 Connection ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified
arm position when checking.
HANARL
Fusing drive 8 Shafts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ FL-955R
unit (grease)
Paper exit 9 Shafts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
drive unit (grease)
10 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 7
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit work Section name Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
sequence
10 Fusing Fusing unit 1 Lower ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
section separation
pawl
2 Lower ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
separation
pawl spring
3 Separation ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
plate
4 Web guide ✕ S – S S S – S S
shaft
5 Web ✕ S – S S S – S S
pressure
roller
bearing
6 Web ✕ S – S S S – S S
pressure
roller
7 Web roller ✕ S – S S S – S S
8 Lower ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
thermistor
9 Pressure ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
roller gear
10 Pressure ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
roller
bearing
11 Pressure ✕ S – S S S – S S Apply grease to the shaft
roller section when replacing.
(JEF552) / After
completion of
replacement, clean the
new pressure roller
surface with alcohol. /
Integrated with the fusing
roller as a maintenance
kit.
Replace at every 240K.
12 Sub ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
thermistor
13 Fusing roller ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
bearing
14 Heat- ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed. /
insulating When replacing, apply
grease to the inner ring
bush
section and the outer ring
section. (JEF552)
15 Heating ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
roller
bearing
16 Fuser belt ✕ S – S S S – S S Integrated with the fusing
guide collar belt as a maintenance kit.
Replace at every 240K.
11 Fusing Fusing unit 17 Fusing roller ✕ S – S S S – S S Apply grease to the shaft
section section when replacing.
(JEF552) / Integrated with
the pressure roller as a
maintenance kit.
Replace at every 240K.
18 Heating ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
roller
19 Fusing belt ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Integrated with the fuser
belt guide collar as a
maintenance kit. / When
replacing, clean the fusing
belt surface with alcohol.
Replace at every 240K.
20 Main ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
thermistor
21 Paper – –
guides
22 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
23 Pressure ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
spring
24 Washer – ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 8
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit work Section name Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
sequence
12 Other 1 Ozone filter – – S – S – S – S
2 Toner User replacement for every toner empty.
cartridge BK
3 Toner
cartridge C
4 Toner
cartridge M
5 Toner
cartridge Y
6 Waste toner Replaced by the user when full is detected. Replacement reference:
box 50K
* 1: Note for cleaning the image density sensor, the registration sensor, and the standard reflection plate
When in maintenance or in case of a service call, refer to "Criteria for necessity of cleaning" below to judge the necessity of cleaning the image
density sensor, the registration sensor, and the standard reflection plate. If it is judged that cleaning is necessary, then execute cleaning.
Greasing
Greasing is not always required for every maintenance. In the fol-
lowing cases, check and grease.
• When there are some noises.
• When a lot of jams occur frequently. (Check the jam history.)
For the part code of grease to be used, refer to "[15] TOOL LIST."
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 9
Option
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean S: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 10
Option Unit work Parts work When At the
Unit name Part name Remark
name sequence sequence calling machine cycle
Stand/ 1 Tray 2 paper feed unit 1 Paper pickup roller ✕ Replace at 100K of each tray paper
3x500 sheet 2 Paper feed roller ✕ feed counter or 1 year of use.
paper drawer 3 Separation roller ✕
4 Transport roller 1 ✕
5 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ Replace at 100K of each tray paper
feed counter.
6 Sensors ✕ ✕
– Paper guides Clean with alcohol.
2 Tray 3 paper feed unit 7 Paper pickup roller ✕ Replace at 100K of each tray paper
8 Paper feed roller ✕ feed counter or 1 year of use.
9 Separation roller ✕
10 Vertical transport roller 1 ✕
11 Transport roller 3 ✕
12 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ Replace at 100K of each tray paper
feed counter.
13 Sensors ✕ ✕
– Paper guides Clean with alcohol.
3 Tray 4 paper feed unit 14 Paper pickup roller ✕ Replace at 100K of each tray paper
15 Paper feed roller ✕ feed counter or 1 year of use.
16 Separation roller ✕
17 Vertical transport roller 2 ✕
18 Transport roller 5 ✕
19 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ Replace at 100K of each tray paper
feed counter.
20 Sensors ✕ ✕
– Paper guides Clean with alcohol.
4 1CS drive unit 21 Gears (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when
checking.
HANARL FL-955R
22 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
5 2CS drive unit 23 Gears (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when
checking.
HANARL FL-955R
24 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
6 3CS drive unit 25 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
Greasing
Greasing is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases, check and grease.
• When there are some noises.
• When a lot of jams occur frequently. (Check the jam history.)
For the part code of grease to be used, refer to "[15] TOOL LIST."
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 11
Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport system
Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport system is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases,
check and clean.
• When a trouble or a jam occurs due to a sensor or a detector. (Check the jam history.)
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 12
A. RSPF section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
RSPF unit 1 Document pickup roller – – Replace at 100K of the SPF
2 Paper feed roller – – paper feed counter or 1 year
of use.
3 Separation roller – – When replacing the paper
feed roller, apply grease to the
paper feed shaft.
GP-501MR
4 Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace at 400K of the SPF
5 Take-up torque limiter ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ paper feed counter or 2 years
of use.
6 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
7 Registration roller – –
8 Transport roller 2 – –
9 Transport roller 3 – –
10 Paper exit roller – –
11 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
12 Scan plate – –
13 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
14 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
15 OC mat – –
4
2
5
14
11
7
11
8
12
10
6
15
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 13
B. Scanner section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
Scanner 1 Drive belt ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
unit 2 Drive wire ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
3 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
4 Rails ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩
5 Mirror – –
6 Reflector – –
7 Scanner lamp – –
8 Lens – –
9 CCD – –
10 Table glass – –
11 SPF glass – –
11 4
3
10
4 2
9
2
5
7
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 14
C. Developing section
Parts work
Unit name Part name When calling 840 K rotation 840 K rotation 840 K rotation Remark
sequence
Developing unit 1 Developer ✕ S S S Replace as needed.
(monochrome) 2 DV seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 DV side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
4 Toner filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Bias pin ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Connector ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Developing unit (color) 1 Developer ✕ S S S
2 DV seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 DV side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
4 Toner filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Bias pin ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Connector ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 15
D. OPC drum section
Parts work
Unit name Part name When calling 840 K rotation 840 K rotation 840 K rotation Remark
sequence
OPC drum unit 1 Drum ✕ S S S 840K rotation or
(monochrome) 2 MC unit ✕ S S S
26cpm machine
3 Cleaning blade ✕ S S S maximum printable
number 140K
4 Toner reception ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
blade 31cpm machine
5 Side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ maximum printable
F/R number 155K
6 Charger ✕ S S S
cleaner
OPC drum unit (color) 1 Drum ✕ S S S 840K rotation or
maximum printable num-
2 MC unit ✕ S S S
ber 140K
3 Cleaning blade ✕ S S S
4 Toner reception ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
blade
5 Side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
6 Charger ✕ S S S
cleaner
6
1
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 16
E. Transfer section
(1) Primary transfer unit
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
Primary 1 Separation pawl ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt ✕ S – S S S – S S When replacing,
apply KYNAR
powder.
3 Secondary drive transmission gear ✕ – –
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller ✕ – –
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller ✕ – –
6 Primary transfer belt tension roller ✕ – –
7 Registration backup roller ✕ – –
8 Y auxiliary roller ✕ – –
9 PTC backup roller ✕ – –
10 Primary transfer roller ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
11 Transfer cleaner seals F/R ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
12 Primary transfer belt cleaner blade ✕ S – S S S – S S
13 Primary transfer toner reception ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
blade
14 Primary transfer operation mode ✕ – –
detector
11
13
14
6
11 10
5
2
12 14
8
1
7 4
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 17
(2) Secondary transfer unit
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer belt follower ✕ – – – –
transfer unit roller
2 Secondary transfer belt ✕ – S – S – S – S Never use alcohol or
solvents for cleaning.
Replace at every 300K.
3 Secondary transfer belt drive ✕ – – – –
roller
4 Secondary transfer backup roller ✕ – – – –
5 Secondary transfer belt tension ✕ – – – –
roller
6 Secondary transfer roller ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ Replace as needed.
7 Secondary transfer drive gear ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕
8 Separation cam ✕ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ When replacing, apply
9 Secondary transfer frame ✕ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ HANARL FL-955R to the
shaft section.
7
2
9
4
1
8
9
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 18
(3) Other
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
Other 1 PTC unit ✕ S – S S S – S S
2 Image density sensor/ ✕ – – Remove dirt from the light emitting/
Registration sensor/ receiving sections (transparent plastic
sections) of the sensor and the
Standard reflection
standard reflection plate (gray plastic
plate section) with dry waste cloth. *1
* 1: Note for cleaning the image density sensor, the registration sensor, and the standard reflection plate
When in maintenance or in case of a service call, refer to "Criteria for necessity of cleaning" below to judge the necessity of cleaning the image
density sensor, the registration sensor, and the standard reflection plate. If it is judged that cleaning is necessary, then execute cleaning.
Criteria for necessity of cleaning
• The SIM44-2 PCS_CL LED ADJ value or PCS_R_LED ADJ value is increased by aging or dirt of the image density sensor. When the image
density is decreased, perform Sim44-2. Then, after that, perform Sim46-74 ‘Copy color balance adjustment’.
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 19
F. LSU section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
LSU 1 Dust-proof glass – – Use the LSU cleaning rod.
Other 2 Cleaning base ✕ Replace every time the waste toner box is replaced. Attached to the waste toner box. (2
pcs.) / Replace when the waste toner
box is replaced, or at 100K, or 2
years of use.
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 20
G. Manual paper feed section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
Manual paper 1 Paper feed roller ✕ – – Replace at 100K of the manual
feed unit 2 Separation roller ✕ – – paper feed counter or 1 year of
use.
3 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
4 Transport roller 9 ✕ – –
5 Transport roller 10 ✕ – –
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
– Paper guides – – Clean with alcohol.
1˴˴˴˴˴
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 21
H. Tray paper feed section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller ✕ – – Replace at 100K of the tray paper
feed unit 2 Paper feed roller ✕ – – feed counter or 1 year of use.
3 Separation roller ✕ – –
4 Transport roller 4 ✕ – –
5 Transport roller 2 ✕ – –
6 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
7 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
– Paper guides – – Clean with alcohol.
7
6
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 22
I. Paper registration section (paper transport section)/Paper exit section/ADU section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) ✕ – –
2 Registration roller (drive) ✕ – –
3 Transport roller 5 ✕ – –
4 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Right door unit 5 Transport roller 7 ✕ – –
6 Transport roller 8 ✕ – –
7 Paper exit roller 3 ✕ – –
8 Paper exit roller 2 ✕ – –
9 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
10 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Fusing rear unit 11 Transport roller 6 ✕ – –
Paper exit unit 12 Paper exit roller 1 ✕ – –
13 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
14 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Other 15 Paper dust removing unit – –
– Paper guides – – Clean with alcohol.
13
10
7
12 14
9
5
11
6
2
15
10
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 23
J. Drive section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
Main drive unit 1 Gears (grease) ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position
Belt drive unit 2 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ when checking.
FLOIL G-313S
3 Shaft earth sections ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position
(conduction grease) when checking.
FLOIL GE-676
4 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
5 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Transport drive unit 6 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
7 Connection arm ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position
Fusing drive unit 8 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ when checking.
HANARL FL-955R
Paper exit drive unit 9 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
10 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
9
10 1
1 3
1
3
7
4
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 24
K. Fusing section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
Fusing unit 1 Lower separation pawl ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
2 Lower separation pawl spring ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
3 Separation plate ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
4 Web guide shaft ✕ S – S S S – S S
5 Web pressure roller bearing ✕ S – S S S – S S
6 Web pressure roller ✕ S – S S S – S S
7 Web roller ✕ S – S S S – S S
8 Lower thermistor ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
9 Pressure roller gear ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
10 Pressure roller bearing ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
11 Pressure roller ✕ S – S S S – S S Apply grease to the shaft
section when replacing.
(JEF552) /
After completion of
replacement, clean the new
pressure roller surface with
alcohol. / Integrated with the
fusing roller as a maintenance
kit.
Replace at every 240K.
12 Sub thermistor ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
13 Fusing roller bearing ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
14 Heat-insulating bush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed. / When
replacing, apply grease to the
inner ring section and the outer
ring section. (JEF552)
15 Heating roller bearing ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
16 Fuser belt guide collar ✕ S – S S S – S S Integrated with the fusing belt
as a maintenance kit.
Replace at every 240K.
17 Fusing roller ✕ S – S S S – S S Apply grease to the shaft
section when replacing.
(JEF552) / Integrated with the
pressure roller as a
maintenance kit.
Replace at every 240K.
18 Heating roller ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
19 Fusing belt ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Integrated with the fuser belt
guide collar as a maintenance
kit. / When replacing, clean the
fusing belt surface with alcohol.
Replace at every 240K.
20 Main thermistor ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
21 Paper guides – –
22 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
23 Pressure spring ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
24 Washer ✕ – ✕ – – – ✕ – –
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 25
16 24
17 15
18
14
20
13
19
4
9
3
16
10 5
12
8
24
14 4
15 11
7
13 10
6
22
5
21
23
23
21
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 26
L. Other
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
1 Ozone filter – – S – S – S – S
2 Toner cartridge BK User replacement for every toner empty.
3 Toner cartridge C
4 Toner cartridge M
5 Toner cartridge Y
6 Waste toner box Replaced by the user when full is detected. Replacement reference: 50K
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 27
M. Option
(1) Stand/500 sheet paper drawer
4 8
7
6
6 8
1
5
2
6
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 28
(2) Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer
15
4 15
14
6
6 15
1
5
2
6
10 16
13 17
12
16
7
8 13 17
11
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 29
(3) Stand/3x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 30
22
4 22
21
6
6 22
1
5
2
6
10 23
13 24
12
23
7
8 13 24
11
9
17 25
20
19
14
15 20
18
16
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 31
(4) Finisher
12
12
12
11
12
7
10 5
7
2
8
1
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 32
(5) Punch unit
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 33
(6) Paper pass unit
3 5
4 2
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 34
(7) Punch unit
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 35
MX-3115N
2 1
1
(6) Left cabinet lower
1) Remove the left cabinet lower.
2) Remove the shield plate.
2 1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1 2
2
1
No. Name
1 RSPF unit
2 RSPF paper feed tray unit
3 RSPF transport unit
1
1 1
2
1 1
2 3 1
4
1
1
3
1
2
When pulling out and pushing in the OPC drum unit, put your
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide
on the right side.
At the time, be careful not to touch the OPC drum surface.
When pulling out and pushing in the developing unit, put your
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide.
At the time, be careful not to touch the developing roller sur-
face.
2
2
1
1
(1) LSU
1) Remove the left cabinet, and the shield plate.
2) Remove the MFP control PWB unit.
Since the MFP control PWB and the LSU mother PWB are
connected together (board to board), use care when removing
and attaching them.
3) Remove the LSU mother PWB unit, and the HDD unit.
1 3
2 1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
7) Remove the cover, and remove the manual paper feed tray.
2
1
4) Remove the cover.
3
2
1
2
1
1
2
No. Name
1 Paper feed tray
2 Tray paper feed unit
3
2 1
3
1 2
(1) Paper dust removing unit 3 3
1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit. (4) Fusing rear unit
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the fusing rear unit.
(2) PS unit
1) Remove the waste toner box. (5) Paper exit unit
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit. 1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
3) Remove the paper feed tray. 2) Remove the paper exit tray.
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit. 3) Remove the paper exit unit.
5) Remove the PS unit.
1
3
When connecting the paper exit unit connector, rotate the harness No. Name
one turn clockwise as shown in the figure below so that the harness 1 Main drive unit
faces toward the arrow A, and connect the connector. 2 Transport drive unit
3 Fusing drive unit
This procedure is necessary for preventing the paper exit sensor
4 Paper exit drive unit
from disconnecting by contact with the harness.
3 3 3
3 1
2
3
3
DV drive shaft
Bearing
Apply screw lock
to this position.
5) Remove the transport drive unit.
Rear side
4
Apply screw lock (0.04g: about one rice grain). (6 positions)
3 3
Front side
Apply screw lock (0.1g: about two rice grains) between the
bearing and the transport drive frame. (4 positions)
Be careful not to apply screw lock between the bearing and the
drive shaft.
Drive Bearing
shaft
2 1
Drive
Apply screw
shaft
lock to this
position.
Bearing
2
1
4
When carrying the fusing unit, be sure to hold the both levers
on the F and R sides of the fusing unit. If only one lever is held
to carry the unit, it may be broken.
1 1
2
(1) SCU PWB 1
1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
2) Remove the SCU PWB.
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1 2
2 1
A
5) Remove the HL control PWB.
1 1
Section A
1
Install so that the left edge of the MC PWB is fitted with the rib
of ozone duct cover B.
1
MC PWB
2
1
1 1
Rib of ozone duct cover B
1
1
1
2 1
1 2
Since the MFP control PWB and the LSU mother PWB are
connected together (board to board), use enough care when
removing and attaching them.
1
1
1
No. Name
1 USB I/F PWB
2 KEY PWB
3 LVDS PWB
4 LCD
5 Touch panel
2) Remove the LCD holder.
1
2
1
Use enough care not to put finger prints on the LCD surface.
b. KEY PWB
1) Remove the Mylar, the earth sheet, and remove the KEY
PWB.
5
7 2
4
1
3
8
1 Square
hole
reference
0 - 0.5mm
2
e. Registration roller
1) Open the paper feed unit, and clean the registration roller.
6
7
8 5
1 2 3 4
10 3
5
4 6
4
11
12
b. Scan plate
1) Clean the scan plate.
7
6
4 2
5
1
d. Lens, CCD
7 1 7 8 9 10 1) Remove the table glass.
6
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
4
1
5 10 9 8 7 1
2 1
2
1
3
3
b. Rails
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Grease each rail.
5
4
3
1 2
1
2
1 2
6) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
When attaching the sheet to the original position, insert the L-
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.
shape sections into the inside of the metal plate and attach the
center portion to the metal plate with double-stick tape.
1
2
4
3
No. Name
1 Developer
2 DV seal
3 DV side seals F/R
4 Toner filter
Thoroughly clean developer unit so that no developer remains
in the unit. Be careful not to scratch the MG roller.
MG roller
a. Developer
1) Open the cover, and remove the developing unit.
Shutter section
When pouring the developer into the unit, use care to not get
developer in to the drive section.
There are two types of the developing unit; (1) the DV cover is
fixed with the DV cover fixing screw, and (2) the DV cover is
fixed with a hook only.
For the type where the DV cover is fixed only a hook, do not
use a screw for fixing.
Otherwise, the DV roller may be damaged.
For the type where the DV cover is fixed with the fixing screw,
there is a groove in the fixing screw hole section as shown in
the figure below.
In some production lots, a sheet is attached instead of this.
Remove the cover with a screwdriver (-) from the rear side. At When attaching the toner filter, be sure filter is completely
that time, be careful not to break the boss on the front side. seated.
When attaching the DV seal to the cover, use care and do not
wrinkle the seal.
When replacing the toner DV side seals F/R, attach a new one
to the reference.
!TTACHMENT REFERENCE
5
2
In order to improve the image quality, the backlash between
the OPC drum shaft and the OPC drum is minimized in this
machine. To pull out the OPC drum shaft, therefore, follow the
a. Drum above procedure.
1) Rotate the OPC drum drive gear in the arrow direction (clock-
wise) to release the drum shaft lock.
Note that conduction grease is applied to the shaft on the OPC
drum drive gear side. Be careful not to attach conduction
grease to the OPC drum surface.
When locking or releasing the lock of the drum shaft, check the
direction of rotating the drum drive gear indicated on the drum 3) Remove the drum.
holder on the rear frame side.
1 2
2
3
2
Bump reference
0 - +0.5mm
Bump reference
0 - +0.5mm
2) After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the
black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the
OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic
acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.
When replacing the side seals F/R, attach the cleaning blade
in advance, then attach a new seal to the reference.
• Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends
(5mm) of the OPC drum.
• Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above
the black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.
Bump reference
0 - +0.2mm
6
5
2
a. Charger cleaner 3
1) Open the front cabinet, and remove the MC cleaning rod. 8
10 1
7
10 4
9
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
3) With the front section of the primary transfer unit slightly lifted,
return the transfer lock cam knob to the neutral angle. b. Primary transfer belt cleaner blade
1) Remove the primary transfer belt cleaner blade.
2
Frame edge reference
0 - 0.3mm
6
4
1
5
3 2
1
1
6
1
2
3 5
4
2
1
Check to confirm that the PTC wire is located at the center
between the PTC cleaner holder and the PTC cleaner.
a. Cleaning base
1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cabinet.
a. Dust-proof glass
1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cabinet.
3) Remove the cleaning base from the waste toner box, and
attach it to the LSU cleaning rod.
3) Insert the LSU cleaning rod with the felt side downward, and
move it back and forth several times to clean the LSU dust-
proof glass.
No. Name
1 Paper feed roller
2 Separation roller
3 Torque limiter
4 Transport roller 9
5 Transport roller 10 (36cpm machine)
1
4
b. Transport roller 9
1) Clean the transport roller 9.
5
3
2
c. Transport roller 10
1) Remove the paper guide, and clean the transport roller 10.
2) Slide the stopper and the collar, and remove the paper feed
roller.
2
1
2 1
3
2
No. Name
1 Paper pickup roller
2 Paper feed roller
3 Separation roller
4 Transport roller 4
5 Transport roller 2
6 Torque limiter
b. Transport roller 4
4 1) Clean the transport roller 4.
1
2
5
c. Transport roller 2
1) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
2 2
2 2
3) Remove the paper pickup roller, and the paper feed roller.
2
1
No. Name
1 Registration roller (Idle)
2 Registration roller (Drive)
3 Transport roller 5
1
2 3
d. Torque limiter
1) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
2 2
2 2
a. Registration roller (Idle), Registration roller (Drive),
Transport roller 5
1) Clean the registration roller (Idle), the registration roller (Drive),
and the transport roller 5.
2
1
2
3
1
3
4
1
1
1 1
2
a. Transport roller 6
1) Clean the transport roller 6.
a. Paper exit roller 1
1) Clean the paper exit roller 1.
b. Discharge brush
1) Remove the holder.
20 Washer
16
20
15
14
13
18 9
17 10
19
8
12
16
14
15
20 1
13
10
11
5
1 6
2
3
7
4
5
4
2
When removing the fusing cover, lift the pawl section with a
screwdriver (-) and remove.
1
1
1
2
1
When attaching, check to confirm that the spring hook is
engaged. 2
1
2
b. Separation plate
1) Remove the paper guide.
2) Remove the spring, and slide it to the front side, and remove
the separation plate.
5) Remove the spring and the web pressure roller bearing, and
remove the web pressure roller.
After assembling the web unit, rotate the drive gear until the
2 1 end position of the start mark on the web sheet comes to the
pressure roller.
Pressure roller
3
2
2 1
1
1
3
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the mounting plate.
Remove the lower thermistor from the mounting plate.
3) Remove the C-ring, the pressure roller gear, and the pressure
4 3 roller gear bearing.
1
2
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
For removal of the pressure roller, remove the lower thermistor
then remove the roller.
f. Sub thermistor
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the sub thermistor.
3 3
2 2
1 1
2
3) Remove the E-ring, the gear, the fusing roller bearing, and the
1
support plate.
6 5
5
1
6 4
4 3
2 1
5
5
1 2
5) Remove the C-ring, the insulation bush, the washers and the
heating roller bearing.
1) Slide the fusing belt unit to the front side, then to the rear side.
1
6) Remove the heating roller from the frame. Remove the washer
and the meandering suppress collar from the heating roller.
2
Remove the heating roller and the fusing roller from the fusing
belt.
When attaching the fusing belt, attach it with the protection 2) Attach the pressure spring, and connect the fusing heater lamp
sheet on it. After attaching the fusing roller bearing, remove the connector.
protection sheet. 3) Shine a light through the clearance between the rear side of
the fusing unit and the frame to confirm that there is a clear-
ance between the fusing belt and the belt guide collar.
After attaching the fusing belt, wipe the belt surface with alco- If there is a clearance between the fusing belt and the belt
hol. guide collar, black color on the surface of the fusing roller (F1)
can be seen. It serves as a criterion of the judgment for pres-
ence of a clearance.
3
1
2
3 5
2
4 Clearance
Earth
terminal
Harness A
Earth
terminal
Harness A
B: Black
W: White
R: Red
2XWHU
䚷>,@*%
WUDFN
䚷>,@*%
>6@
>,@*% >,@*% >/@*% >6@*%
*
>6@*% >6@*%
>6@*%
>6@*%
>6@*%
,QQHU
WUDFN >6@*% >/@*%
>*%@
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
[GB]
Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the
main unit.
Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
Enable/
Before installation After installation Enable/
Disable of Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Backup means Disable of
data procedures operator
from the factory) users) data reinstall
backup
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
15 User color profile Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE.
16 Mirroring information (When Not available Available Disable Not available Enable The mirroring Service
the mirroring kit is installed, (After installation information is
the mirroring information is of the mirroring erased by
written.) kit) forcible build or
RIB BUSTER.
17 Individual setting Not available Available Disable Disable Service
information for direct WEB
browsing
18 Cookie file for OSA Not available Available Disable Disable Service
application
19 eOSA application file Not available Installation of Disable Enable Reinstallation of Service
application application
20 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable Disable Service
server (NAS)
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.
',5!:0
x The file exists only in the USB memory.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 12
7(67 &/26( 3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/( • When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
',5!0$18$/
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
1.
4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
the watermark data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
are installed.
• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
1.
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
SIM66-10 FAX image memory clear SIM62-8 Hard disk format (Excluding the system area)
HDD HDD
Partition Partition
Partition Partition
number number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3 I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3 I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2 I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
L-1 System storage data *3 L-1 System storage data *3
L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3 L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3
installed, the mirroring information is written.) installed, the mirroring information is written.)
S-1 User data 1 *3 S-1 User data 1 *1
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3 S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3 S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1
S-3 Redial information of the address book *3 S-3 User setting information for direct WEB browsing / *1
S-5 Printer spooler *3 Cookie file for OSA application
S-6 Application work *3 S-5 Printer spooler *1
S-9 DSK data save *3 S-6 Application work *1
S-7 eOSA application file *1
SD Card S-8 User file saved in the SMB server (NAS) *1
S-9 DSK data save *1
Partition
Partition
number SD Card
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2
I-102 FAX/Internet Fax reception data (Backup) *2 Partition
Partition
L-101 ICU firmware *3 number
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3 I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3 L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-103 User data 2 *3 S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3 S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW) S-103 User data 2 *1
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
SIM62-1 Hard disk format (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
HDD
SIM62-10 Job complete list (Job log data) delete
Partition
Partition
HDD
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1 Partition
Partition
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1 number
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1 I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3
L-1 System storage data *1 I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3
L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3 I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
installed, the mirroring information is written.) L-1 System storage data *3
S-1 User data 1 *1 L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3 installed, the mirroring information is written.)
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1 S-1 User data 1 *3
S-3 User setting information for direct WEB browsing / *1 S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
Cookie file for OSA application S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *2
S-5 Printer spooler *1 S-5 Printer spooler *3
S-6 Application work *1 S-6 Application work *2
S-7 eOSA application file *1 S-9 DSK data save *3
S-8 User file saved in the SMB server (NAS) *1
S-9 DSK data save *1 SD Card
SD Card Partition
Partition
number
Partition I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
Partition
number I-102 FAX/Internet Fax reception data (Backup) *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3 L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3 S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3 S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3 S-103 User data 2 *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW) S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
S-103 User data 2 *1 (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
Partition
Partition
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *2
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *2
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-1 System storage data *3
L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3
installed, the mirroring information is written.)
S-1 User data 1 *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3
S-5 Printer spooler *2
S-6 Application work *3
S-9 DSK data save *3
SD Card
Partition
Partition
number
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-103 User data 2 *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
Partition
Partition
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-1 System storage data *3
L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3
installed, the mirroring information is written.)
S-1 User data 1 *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *2
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3
S-5 Printer spooler *3
S-6 Application work *3
S-9 DSK data save *3
SD Card
Partition
Partition
number
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-103 User data 2 *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
1. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX MX-XXXX
H. User Control 2
MX-XXXX
I. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log
MX-XXXX
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.
ent PC.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4) View Syslog
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
㪦㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㪛㩷㪧㫉㫆㪽㫀㫃㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
The machine ID can be set with SIM26-7 as well as this function.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
5
4
3
2
1
No.
OCSW
PWRSW
MX-3115N
#.
&( 3 3(
'.$
Signal name
6!
6
2
2
2
2
KEY PWB
2
LVDS PWB
2
2
Name
3#!.$!4! 3#!.$!4! ,#$?!?0 '.$ %.!6
3#!.$!4! '.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?#,+?0 (SYNC
'.$ 3#!.$!4! '.$ ,#$?#,+?- 6SYNC
3#!.#,+/54 .# 6 ,#$?#,+?0 '.$ -/$
Name
3#!.#,+/54 3#!.$!4! ,#$?#,+?- ,#$?!?0 234"
'.$ '.$ '.$ ,#$?!?- 34"9"
3#!.$!4! 3#!.#,+/54 ,#$?!?0 '.$ 3(,2
3#!.$!4! '.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?0 6
'.$ 3#!.#,+/54 '.$ ,#$?!?- 50$.
'.$ ,#$?!?0 ##&4 9(?9?3#, .#
,#$?$!4! ,#$?!?- 8,?8?3$! 9,?9?).4 6
,#$?#,+ '.$ 6 '.$ 6
'.$ '.$ 6 '.$ 6
,#$?$!4! ,#$?#,+?0 '.$ 6 6
,#$?$!4! ,#$?#,+?- '.$ 6 .#
0.,?3%, ,#$?!?0 6 6 6'(
0.,?3%, ,#$?!?- 6 6 6
,#$3%,?( 6 '.$ 6',
6,%$
6,%$
,#$3%,?( '.$ '.$ .#
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
'.$ '.$
#.
6#/.4 '.$
3#?4%-0
8,8
'.$
9(9
07237
#. #.
"" 0($33 3" 0( 3- 4"
07"
.07237 6,%$
'.$ #. .#
,6$3
USB Interface
'.$ 0($2 63 6,%$
N,#$?$)30 N,#$?$)30
N2%3?3#. N2%3?3#.
48$?3#. 48$?3#.
28$?3#. 28$?3#.
30?#,/3%?( .# .# 30?#,/3%?(
30%$ ( 30%$ ( "0 0( + 3
+%9).?.( .# .# +%9).?.( '.$
N75?+%9 .# '.$ 0$
N).&/?,%$ 6
#.
N0/&?3#. N0/&?3#. "" 0($33
N243?3#. N243?3#. 6/
N#43?3#. N#43?3#. 6/
6 6 N(-?+%9 .#
0#5?2%1
":2
3#?!#+ N(-?,%$ .#
&
/#37
&'
6!
6
Function/Operation
#.
"" 0( + 3
6# 6
'.$ /#37
/#37 '.$
6 6(0,'.,
3):%?,%$
3):%?,%$ 6
3):%?,%$
3):%?,%$
'.$
"50 4: 3,& 3.
#:(2 6 3 #:(2 6 3
N07237
'.$ 32! 4 #.
'.$ .# "" 0!3+
N75?+%9 6/
N).&/?,%$ N).&/?,%$
0/7?,%$ .#
75?,%$
Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. / Controls the touch panel.
#. (23 #. (23
&( 3 36
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
&83 3 36
MIM
No.
'.$ '.$
'.$
MHPS
'.$
CL_ON
'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$
#. '.$ '.$
"" 0($33 '.$ '.$
Lens
Signal name
'.$ '.$ '.$
'.$ '.$ '.$
6 #. !&%?3$ #. !&%?3$/
Reflector
230&
6/
1st mirror
!&%?3$4 !&%?3$4
3rd mirror
2nd mirror
SCU PWB
CCD PWB
6 !&%?3#,+ !&%?3#,+
6" !&%?#3 !&%?#3
.# 6 N2%3?##$!$ N2%3?##$!$
6 '.$ '.$
6 !6 !6
.# 6 !6 !6
$2)6%2 07"
#. ! '.$ !6 !6
"" 0($33 '.$ !6 !6
Scan motor
'.$ !6 !6
'.$ !6 !6
Scanner lamp
300$ '.$ '.$
300$ !6 !6
Name
30&-! 30&-! !6 !6
30&-! 30&-! '.$ '.$
30&-" 30&-" #. 4! . #. 4! .
30&-" 30&-" #. 4! 0 #. 4! 0
Name
30&-/ 30&-/ '.$ '.$
305-! 30-! #. 4" . #. 4" .
305-! 30-! #. 4" 0 #. 4" 0
305-" 30-" '.$ '.$
#,?/.
#.
"" 0( + 3 "" 0( 3- 4"
-)-?! -)-?!
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
-)-?" -)-?"
-)-?! -)-?!
"" 0( + 3
)$26
Converges the scanner lamp lights and radiates onto the document.
)$26
)$26
)$26
)$26
Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
)$26
6
Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
#. #.
#0"& !0"
60$ 60$ "" 0( + 3
60$ 60$ )$26
,!-0 ,!-0 )$26
'.$ '.$ )$26
'.$ '.$ )$26
)$26
-)-
)$26
,%$ $26 07"
6
B. Operational descriptions
(1) General
This section performs the following operations.
1) Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and
B
G
the reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD ele-
R
ments to be converted into analog image signals.
2) The analog image signals are converted into 10-bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The digital image signals are sent to the scanner control PWB
for image processing.
(2) Detailed descriptions
a. Optical section drive
The optical section is driven as follows: The drive power is transmit- R
ted from the scanner motor (MIM) through the belt to the drive pul- G
ley/wire, and the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are
B
attached to the wire are driven.
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled with the signals sent from Image data of one line
the scanner control PWB.
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
which is generated by the scanner lamp drive PWB with the control R G B
signals sent from the scanner control PWB. Red component Green component Blue component
image data image data image data
c. Image scan and color separation
Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
d. Image signal A/D conversion
reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD elements to
be converted into analog image signals. 1) Each image signal (analog) of R, G, and B is converted into a
The color components are extracted into R, G, and B by the three 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter in the CCD PWB.
kinds of CCD elements (R, G, and B). Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The red CCD extracts the red component of an image, the green 2) Each 10bit digital image signal of R, G, and B is outputted from
CCD extracts the green component, and the blue CCD extracts the the CCD PWB and sent to the SCU PWB, where it is con-
blue component. This operation is called color separation. verted into an 8bit signal and sent to the MFP PWB.
The CCD element is apparently seen as one unit, but it includes the
three kinds of elements (R, G, and B). ##$ 07"
The CCD element scans the document in the main scanning direc- !NALOG )#
tion. Scanning in the sub scanning direction is made by shifting the ##$
!&% !$# ,6$3
scanner unit with the scanner motor. ,INES 2
The document images are optically reduced by the lens and '
"
reflected to the CCD.
The scanning direction is 600dpi. "UFFER
4IMING
'ENERATOR
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not made optically, but
performed by the image process technology (software).
SMR-06V-N SMP-06V-NC
SMR-06V-N
1 F-GND 1 179228-3
2 MPED 2 1 MPED
3 D-GND 3 2 D-GND
4 5VN+R 4 3 5VN+R
5 24V3 5
6 /MPFS 6
B14B-PHDSS SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
5VNin 13 1 24V3 1
D-GND 8 2 /MPFS 2
5VN+R3 7
5VN+R2 5 F.G
D-GND 4 SRA-01T-3.2
5VN+R1 3
D-GND 2
4
5VNin 1
R-DOOR PWB
3
DF11-4DS-2C
+DF11-4DP-SP1(05)
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
CN10
B26B-PHDSS
1
2
3
4
MPED 1
QR/P4-32P-C(01)
/MPFS 3 QR/P4-32S-C(01) S4B-PH-K-S
3. Manual paper feed section
5
5VNPD+R 25 3 /MPFS 3
1 D-GND 1 4 TH_M
3.3V 2 17 3.3V 17 2 3.3V 2
HUD_M 4 18 HUD_M 18 3 HUD_M 3 B3B-PH-K-S
TH_M 6 19 TH_M 19 4 TH_M 4 1 D-GND
MPWS 8 20 MPWS 20 5 MPWS 5 2 MPWS
2
/MPLD 10 21 /MPLD 21 6 5VN+R 6 3 5VN+R
5VN+R 24 (NC) 22 (NC) 22 (NC) 7 /MPLD 7
5VN+R 26 (NC) 30 5VN 30 8 5VN+R 8
31 5VNPD 31
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
32 D-GND 32
3
2
1
1
PCU PWB
5VN+R
D-GND
MPLD1
CN-2
B6B-PH-K-S
1 D-GND
2 INT24V1L
3 INT24V1
4 DSW_R<24V>
CN-11 5 DSW_F<24V>
B34B-PHDSS 6 /INT_CNT
INT24V1L 1
MPED
P-GND 3
/POM_CW_CCW_/A 5
/POM_ENABLE_B 7
/POM_CLK_A 9
/POM_MODE_/B 11
/POM_CNT 13
D-GND 15
MPWS
MPFS
/ADUM_MODE 23
/ADUM_ENABLE 25
/RRM_CNT 27
D-GND 29
Driver PWB
/RRM_CLK 31
/RRM_ENABLE 33
INT24V1 2
P-GND 4
HUD_M/TH_M
5VN 6 CN-1
18 /ADUM_CLK B08B-PH-K-S
/ADUM_CNT 24 17 /RRM_ENABLE PFM_OUT_/A 5
/ADUM_CLK 26 16 /POM_CLK_A PFM_OUT_A 6 B6B-PH-K-S
/PFM_CNT 28 15 /RRM_MODE PFM_OUT_B 7 2 PFM_OUT_/A
/PFM_MODE 30 14 /PFM_CLK PFM_OUT_/B 8 3 PFM_OUT_/B
/PFM_CLK 32 13 /PFM_CNT 4 PFM_OUT_A
/PFM_ENABLE 34 12 /ADUM_MODE 5 PFM_OUT_B
11 /PFM_ENABLE
10 /ADUM_ENABLE
9 /PFM_MODE
5VN
8 /ADUM_CNT
CN-12
7 /POM_CNT
/CPFM_D
6 /POM_MODE_/B INT24V1L 5
/CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CLK
/CPFM_CNT
5 /POM_CW_CCW_/A INT24V1L 6 (NC)
PFM
B28B-PHDSS
4 /POM_ENABLE_B GND 7
3 5VN
2 D-GND
1 D-GND
28
26
24
22
20
B7B-PASK-1
1 INT24V1L
DRV PWB CN3 2 P-GND
CPFM
3 /CPFM_CNT
4 /CPFM_CLK
5 /CPFM_D
6 5V
7 CPFM_LD
48M108F070
Signal name Name Function/Operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity. (For the process control)
MPED Paper empty sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Detects presence of paper. (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual paper feed) Controls the paper feed roller. (Manual paper feed)
MPLD Paper length detector (Manual paper feed tray) Detects the paper length. (Manual paper feed tray)
MPWS Paper width detector (Manual paper feed tray) Detects the paper width. (Manual paper feed tray)
PFM Transport motor Drives the transport rollers 5 and 9.
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Paper feed operation
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it to the
paper feed roller section.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to prevent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual paper feed
clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the manual transport roller.
(2) Paper size detection
The paper size is detected by the combination of the following detectors on the manual paper feed tray.
Paper size detection table
Paper width detector (MPWS)
Series Paper size Paper length detector (MPLD)
Detection width (mm)
A3W ON 301 - 310.4
A3 ON 291 - 301
11" x 17" ON 273.4 - 285.4
B4 ON 251 - 263
8.5" x 14" ON 209.9 - 221.9
8.5" x 13" ON 209.9 - 221.9
AB series A4 – 291 - 305
8.5" x 11" – 273.4 - 285.4
B5 – 251 - 263
A4R – 204 - 216
B5R – 176 - 188
A5R – 142.5 - 154
Postcard – 96 - 106
12" x 18" ON 301 - 310.4
A3 ON 291 - 301
11" x 17" ON 273.4 - 285.4
B4 ON 251 - 263
8.5" x 14" ON 209.9 - 221.9
8.5" x 13" ON 209.9 - 221.9
INCH series
A4 – 291 - 305
8.5" x 11" – 273.4 - 285.4
B5 – 251 - 263
8.5" x 11"R – 209.9 - 221.9
7.25" x 10.5"R – 178.1 - 190.1
5.5" x 8.5"R – 133.7 - 145.7
CPFM
PFC_HPFC
CPUC1
CLUD1 CPFC1
CPED1
3 DSW_C1
5 CPFD1
CLUM1
4 8
7 2
1
6
CSS11
CSPD1
SMR-02V-N
SMR-02V-N
SMR-02V-N
48M108F070
1
2
1
2
1
2
/CPFM_CNT
/CPFM_CLK
B7B-PASK-1
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
1 /CPUC1
1 /CPFC1
1 /HPFC
2 24V3
2 24V3
2 24V3
SMP-02V-NC
SMP-02V-NC
SMP-02V-NC
5V
3
4
5
6
7
17
19
21
18
20
22
B34B-PHDSS
CN-11
/PFC_/HPFC
/CPUC1
/CPFC1
24V3
24V3
24V3
CN-12
B28B-PHDSS
/CPFM_CNT 20
/CPFM_CLK 22
/CPFM_D 24
DF11-8DS-2C DF11-8DS-2C 5VN 26
+DF11-8DP-SP1(05) +DF11-8DP-SP1(05) /CPFM_LD 28
SRA-21T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
03XR-6H-P
D-GND 3
1 2 3 4 5 8 1 2 3 4 7 8
/CLUD1 2
5VNPD 1 BU15P-TZ-P-H
(NC) 2
1 FG
CPUS1
15
14
PCU PWB
(NC) 3 24V 13
03XR-6H-P
D-GND 3 4 D-GND 12
/CPED1 2 5 /CLUD1 11
5VNPD 1 6 5VNPD 10
7 D-GND 9
8 /CPED1 8 CN-9(1/2)
9 5VNPD 7 B34B-PHDSS
03XR-6H-P
D-GND 3 10 D-GND 6 17 /CPUS1
/CPFD1 2 11 /CPFD1 5 19 24V3
5VNPD 1 12 5VNPD 4 21 D-GND
13 D-GND 3 23 /CLUD1
14 /DSW_C1 2 25 /CPED1
15 5VN 1 27 /CPFD1
03XR-6H-P
D-GND 3 15CZ-6H 29 5VNPD
/DSW_C1 2 31 /DSW_C1
5VN 1 33 5VN
B2B-PH-K-S
PHR-2
P-GND 1 18 P-GND
CLUM1# 2 20 CLUM1#
22 D-GND
B4B-PH-K-S 24 /CSS11
PHR-4
/CSS11 1
D-GND 2
(NC) 3 30
(NC) 4 32 /CSPD1
179228-3
5VNPD 1
/CSPD1 2
D-GND 3
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Paper feed front operation
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
• The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
• The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate stops at the specified position.
(2) Paper feed operation
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup timing, feeding
paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent
against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper empty. The result
is displayed.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
RRM
PFM
3 PPD2
PPD1
03XR-6H-P
2
1
CN-2
B6B-PH-K-S
1 D-GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
VHPGP2A200L-18
DF11-8DS-2C
PCU PWB CN-11
2 INT24V1L
3 INT24V1
+DF11-8DP-SP1(05) B34B-PHDSS 4 DSW_R<24V>
INT24V1L 1 5 DSW_F<24V>
P-GND 3 6 /INT_CNT
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
/POM_CW_CCW_/A 5
1 RRM_OUT_/B
2 RRM_OUT_/A
2 PFM_OUT_/A
3 PFM_OUT_/B
3 RRM_OUT_B
4 RRM_OUT_A
/POM_ENABLE_B 7
4 PFM_OUT_A
5 PFM_OUT_B
DF11-8DS-2C /POM_CLK_A 9
B4B-PH-K-S
B6B-PH-K-S
D-GND
5VNPD
/PPD1
+DF11-8DP-SP1(05) /POM_MODE_/B 11
5VNPD
D-GND
/PPD2
5
6
CN-9(1/2)
1
/POM_CNT 13
B34B-PHDSS D-GND 15
D-GND
D-GND
29 5VNPD
/ADUM_MODE 23 Driver PWB
1
2
3
1
2
14 /PPD1
3
/ADUM_ENABLE 25
16 /PPD2
03XR-6H-P
/RRM_CNT 27
6
7
D-GND 29
/RRM_CLK 31 CN-6
/RRM_ENABLE 33 B08B-PH-K-S
RRM_OUT_/A 1
SRA-01T-3.2
INT24V1 2
07CZ-6Y
RRM_OUT_A 2
P-GND 4
CN-1 RRM_OUT_B 3
5VN 6
B24B-PHDSS-B RRM_OUT_/B 4
D-GND 8
PFM_OUT_/A 5
DSW_R<24V> 10 (NC) 24 SLEEP_DRV
BU07P-TZ-S
PFM_OUT_A 6
2
7
6
5
4
3
DSW_F<24V> 12 23 D-GND
PFM_OUT_B 7
/INT_CNT 14 22 D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
F-GND
/PPD2
/PPD1
PFM_OUT_/B 8
D-GND 16 21 D-GND
20 /RRM_CNT
07CZ-6H
19 /RRM_CLK
18 /ADUM_CLK
/ADUM_CNT 24 17 /RRM_ENABLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
/ADUM_CLK 26 16 /POM_CLK_A
BU09P-TZ-S
/PFM_CNT 28
2 D-GND 8 /PFM_MODE 30 14 /PFM_CLK
3 D-GND 7 /PFM_CLK 32 13 /PFM_CNT
4 /PPD1 6 /PFM_ENABLE 34 12 /ADUM_MODE
5 5VNPD 5 11 /PFM_ENABLE
6 D-GND 4 10 /ADUM_ENABLE
7 /PPD2 3 9 /PFM_MODE
8 5VNPD 2 8 /ADUM_CNT
9 F-GND 1 7 /POM_CNT
09CZ-6H 6 /POM_MODE_/B
5 /POM_CW_CCW_/A
4 /POM_ENABLE_B
SRA-01T-3.2 3 5VN
2 D-GND
1 D-GND
B. Operational descriptions
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the registration roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each transport
roller is made by the paper transport clutch. The registration roller controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer image.
The registration roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by the ON timing
of the transport motor.
FUM
B28B-PHDSS
24V3 (with Fuse) 6 SMP-06V-NC SMR-06V-N
ADUM
OSM_/B 7 1 OSM_/B 1
OSM_/A 8 2 OSM_/A 2
OSM_B 9 3 OSM_B 3
OSM_A 10 4 OSM_A 4
5 24V3 5
Signal name
POFM_V 11
SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N
/POFM_CNT 13
1 POFM_V 1
P-GND 15
2 /POFM_CNT 2
POFM_LD 17
3 P-GND 3
4 POFM_LD 4
POFM_V2 12
4
/POFM_CNT2 14 SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N
P-GND 16 1 POFM_V2 1
POFM2_LD 18 2 /POFM_CNT2 2
3 P-GND 3 BU09P-TZ-S
4 POFM2_LD 4
7
CZHR-09V-S CZHR-09V-S
ADU motor
1 /POD3 9 1 5VN+R5
2 D-GND 8 2 D-GND
Fusing motor
3 5VN+R5 7 3 /POD3
8
B10B-PHDSS 179228-3 VHPSG2481++-1
D-GND 10
POFM
5VN+R4 9
Name
10
D-GND 8
5VN+R5 7
PWB
D-GND 6
6. Paper exit section
2
D-GND 5
D-GND 4
6
5VNPD+R3 3
R-DOOR
D-GND 2
5VNPD+R4 1
CN10
5
B26B-PHDSS
1
9
/TFD3 13
/PRTPD 15 QR/P4-32S-C(01) QR/P4-32P-C(01)
13 /TFD3 13
14 /PRTPD 14 BU09P-TZ-S
POFM2
TFD2
POD1
B6B-PH-K-S
1 (NC)
2 ADUM_L_OUT_/A
POD2
3 ADUM_L_OUT_/B
PRTPD
SHPOS
4 ADUM_L_OUT_A
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
5 ADUM_L_OUT_B 179228-3
6 (NC) 1 /PRTPD
2 D-GND
POD3
SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N 3 5VO
OSM
VHPSG2481++-1
TFD3
B7B-PASK-1 3 ADUMB 3
10 1 INT24V1L 4 ADUM/B 4
ADUM
CN-13 DRV PWB CN5 9 2 P-GND
B24B-PHDSS
(NC) 3 (NC)
/FUM_CK 15 4 /FUM_CK
/FUM_D 17 5 /FUM_D
POM
FUM
/POM_CW_CCW_/A 5
/POM_ENABLE_B 7
Driver PWB
/POM_CLK_A 9 CN-5
/POM_MODE_/B 11 B11B-PH-K-S
/POM_CNT 13 ADUM_OUT_/B 8
D-GND 15 ADUM_OUT_B 7
ADUM_OUT_A 6
/ADUM_MODE 23 ADUM_OUT_/A 5 B6B-PH-K-S
/ADUM_ENABLE 25 POM_OUT_/B 4 1 (NC)
/RRM_CNT 27 POM_OUT_B 3 2 POM_OUT_/A
CN-13 D-GND 29 POM_OUT_A 2 3 POM_OUT_/B
Function/Operation
8 5VNPD P-GND 4
10 /POD2 5VN 6
12 D-GND D-GND 8 CN-1
Drives the ADU and the transport roller in the right paper exit section.
14 5VN DSW_R<24V> 10 B24B-PHDSS-B
16 /TFD2 DSW_F<24V> 12 23 D-GND
18 D-GND /INT_CNT 14 22 D-GND VHPLG248NL1-1
20 5VNPD D-GND 16 21 D-GND
20 /RRM_CNT 3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND
22 /SHPOS
19 /RRM_CLK 2 /POD1 2 2 /POD1
24 D-GND
1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
/PFC_/HPFC 22 18 /ADUM_CLK
/ADUM_CNT 24 17 /RRM_ENABLE SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N 179228-3
/ADUM_CLK 26 16 /POM_CLK_A
/PFM_CNT 28
/PFM_MODE 30 14 /PFM_CLK SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
/PFM_CLK 32 13 /PFM_CNT VHPLG248NL1-1
B7B-PASK-1
/PFM_ENABLE 34 12 /ADUM_MODE
11 /PFM_ENABLE 3 D-GND
10 /ADUM_ENABLE 2 /SHPOS
9 /PFM_MODE 1 5VNPD
8 /ADUM_CNT 179228-3
7 /POM_CNT
6 /POM_MODE_/B
VHPLG248NL1-1
5 /POM_CW_CCW_/A
4 /POM_ENABLE_B 3 D-GND
10 F-GND 10
3 5VN 2 TFD2
9 D-GND 9
2 D-GND 1 5VN
8 /SHPOS 8 179228-3
1 D-GND 7 5VNPD 7
6 D-GND 6
5 TFD2 5
4 5VN 4 VHPLG248NL1-1
3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND
2 /POD2 2 2 /POD2
1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
179228-3
DF1B-10DES-2.5RC DF1B-10DEP-2.5RC
Signal name Name Function/Operation
OSM Offset motor Offsets (shifts) paper.
POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Detects paper transport from the fusing section.
POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Detects paper transport to the face-down paper exit tray.
POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Detects paper transport to the right paper exit tray.
POFM Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POM Paper exit motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray).
(Right paper exit tray)
SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor Detects the shifter home position.
TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector Detects paper full in the face-down paper exit tray.
(Face-down tray)
TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector Detects paper full in the right paper exit tray.
(Right paper exit tray)
B. Operational descriptions
• The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller 6 (which is driven by the ADU motor) to paper exit roller 1, and
then discharged to the inner tray.
• When the paper is discharged to the right tray: The paper is transported to paper exit roller 1, and the paper exit motor is reversed. Then the
paper is passed over the right paper exit gate through paper exit roller 2 to the right tray.
QR/P4-32S-C(01) QR/P4-32P-C(01)
3.3V 2
HUD_M 4 1 MPED 1
TH_M 6 2 24V3 2
MPWS 8 3 /MPFS 3
/MPLD 10 4 /2TUD 4
DSW-ADU 12 5 /2TURC 5
6 24V3 6
5
APPD1 14
/POD3 16 7 /2TCCRU 7
/ADUGS# 18 8 APPD2 8
7
(NC) 9 (NC) 9 (NC)
6
24V3 20
(NC) 10 (NC) 10 (NC)
7
D-GND 22 (NC)
5VN+R 24 11 /ADUGS# 11
3
12 24V3 12
1
5VN+R 26 (NC)
13 /TFD3 13
4
14 /PRTPD 14 SRA-21T-3
179228-3
8
15 5VO 15
2
SRA-21T-3 16 F-GND 16 1 APPD2
17 3.3V 17 2 D-GND
18 HUD_M 18 3 5VNPD+R
19 TH_M 19
179228-3
20 MPWS 20
21 /MPLD 21 1 DSW-ADU
(NC) 22 (NC) 22 (NC) 2 D-GND
23 ADUM/A 23 3 5VNPD+R3
24 ADUMA 24 179228-3
25 ADUMB 25 1 APPD1
26 ADUM/B 26 2 D-GND
PCU PWB
27 DSW-ADU 27 3 5VN+R4
28 APPD1 28
29 /POD3 29
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
30 5VN 30
31 5VNPD 31
APPD2
APPD1
32 D-GND 32
POD3
DSW_ADU
CN-11
B34B-PHDSS
INT24V1L 1
6 (NC)
1 (NC)
P-GND 3
/POM_CW_CCW_/A 5
SMP-04V-NC
B6B-PH-K-S
/POM_ENABLE_B 7
3 ADUMB
2 ADUMA
/POM_CLK_A 9
4 ADUM/B
1 ADUM/A
ADUM
/POM_MODE_/B 11
5 ADUM_L_OUT_B
4 ADUM_L_OUT_A
3 ADUM_L_OUT_/B
2 ADUM_L_OUT_/A
/POM_CNT 13 CN-2
4
3
2
1
VHPSG2481++-1
D-GND 15 B6B-PH-K-S
1 D-GND
/POD3
D-GND
2 INT24V1L
SMR-04V-N
5VN+R5
3 INT24V1
/ADUM_MODE 23 4 DSW_R<24V>
3
2
1
/ADUM_ENABLE 25 5 DSW_F<24V>
/RRM_CNT 27 6 /INT_CNT
D-GND 29 CN-5
179228-3
/RRM_CLK 31 B11B-PH-K-S
(NC)
PFM
/RRM_ENABLE 33 ADUM_OUT_/B 8
3
4
6
11
12
13
14
ADUM_OUT_B 7
INT24V1 2 ADUM_OUT_A 6
P-GND 4 ADUM_OUT_/A 5
5VN 6
D-GND
D-GND
8 D-GND
10 D-GND
2 D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND 8 BU09P-TZ-S
7 5VN+R5
9 5VN+R4
B10B-PHDSS
5VNPDin
DSW_R<24V> 10 B24B-PHDSS-B
5VNPD+R3
5VNPD+R1
B14B-PHDSS
/ADUM_CNT 24 19 /RRM_CLK
/ADUM_CLK 26 18 /ADUM_CLK
/PFM_CNT 28 17 /RRM_ENABLE
R-DOOR
/PFM_MODE 30 16 /POM_CLK_A
/PFM_CLK 32
/PFM_ENABLE 34 14 /PFM_CLK
13 /PFM_CNT
12 /ADUM_MODE
11 /PFM_ENABLE
10 /ADUM_ENABLE
Driver PWB
9 /PFM_MODE
8 /ADUM_CNT
7 /POM_CNT
6 /POM_MODE_/B
5 /POM_CW_CCW_/A
4 /POM_ENABLE_B
3 5VN
2 D-GND
1 D-GND
CN-6
B08B-PH-K-S
PFM_OUT_/A 5
PFM_OUT_A 6 B6B-PH-K-S
PFM_OUT_B 7 2 PFM_OUT_/A
PFM_OUT_/B 8 3 PFM_OUT_/B
4 PFM_OUT_A
5 PFM_OUT_B
Signal name Name Function/Operation
ADUM ADU motor Drives the transport roller in the ADU right paper exit section.
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1 Detects paper entry and paper pass in the ADU.
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 Detects paper pass in the ADU transport roller 8.
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector Detects open/close of the ADU paper guide.
PFM Transport motor Drives the transport rollers 5 and 9.
POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Detects paper transport to the right paper exit tray.
B. Operational descriptions
• The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller 6 (which is driven by the ADU motor) to paper exit roller 1.
At that time, the paper passed under the gate.
• When POD1 detects the paper lead edge, the paper exit drive motor reverses.
• By reversion of the paper exit motor, the paper is sent to the ADU section. At that time, the paper passes over the ADU guide which fell by its
own weight.
• Transport rollers 7 and 8 are driven the ADU motor, and transport roller 9 by the transport motor. The paper is transported to the duplex
paper feed position.
• The paper is once stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and transported again to the inside of the machine.
13
14
12
LSU MOTHER PWB PCU PWB
CN-11 CN-2
12
B20B-CZWHK-B-1 B20B-CZWHK-B-1
10CZ-6H 10CZ-6H
D-GND
TxD_PCU
B-10
B-9
B-1 D-GND
B-2 TxD_PCU
16 5
RxD_PCU
PRTPD_out
B-8
B-7
B-3 RxD_PCU
B-4 PRTPD_out
12
TRANS_RST B-6 B-5 TRANS_RST
TRANS_DAT B-5 B-6 TRANS_DAT
JOBEND_INT B-4 B-7 JOBEND_INT 5 12
Vref2
5VO
B-3
B-2
B-8 Vref2
B-9 5VO
16
D-GND B-1 B-10 D-GND
10CZ-6Y 10CZ-6Y
D-GND
nRES_PCU
A-1
A-2
A-10
A-9
D-GND
/RES_PCU 5
nRTS_PCU A-3 A-8 /RTS_PCU
nCTS_PCU A-4 A-7 /CTS_PCU
/POF A-5 A-6 /POF
16 5
LSU_RST
SCK
A-6
A-7
A-5
A-4
LSU_RST
SCK 9
RSV_DAT A-8 A-3 RSV_DAT
TH1_LSU A-9 A-2 TH1_LSU
D-GND A-10 A-1 D-GND
10 PGM 9 BD
TH1_LSU 3 11
4
15
2 7
2
6 6
7 10
LSU UN (600dpi)
LD PWB 8
CN-500
TX24-60R-6ST-H1E
WP_KC 1
CN-2
TX25-60P-6ST-H1E WP_KC 1
8
SDA_KC 31 #MS_SET_C_on 2 SDA_KC 31 #MS_SET_C_on 2
SCL_KC 32 DT_C1+ 3 SCL_KC 32 DT_C1+ 3
LDCHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4 LDCHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4
n_LDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 n_LDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 CN-4 CN1
n_LDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 n_LDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 S5B-PH-K-S B04B-PH-K-S
PHR-5
VREF_C 36 DT_K1+ 7 VREF_C 36 DT_K1+ 7 TH 1 3 TH
nENB_YMC 37 DT_K1- 8 nENB_YMC 37 DT_K1- 8 D-GND 2 4 D-GND
n_LDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 n_LDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 BD 3
VREF_Y 39 DT_K2- 10 VREF_Y 39 DT_K2- 10 D-GND 4
nSH_C 40 D-GND 11 nSH_C 40 D-GND 11 5VD 5
nSH_Y
VREF_K
41
42
D-GND
(NC)
12
13
B to B nSH_Y
VREF_K
41
42
D-GND
(NC)
12
13
SH_K 43 (NC) 14 SH_K 43 (NC) 14 CN1
nENB_K 44 (NC) 15 nENB_K 44 (NC) 15 S5B-PH-K-S
nSH_M 45 (NC) 16 nSH_M 45 (NC) 16 3 BD
(NC) 46 (NC) 17 (NC) 46 (NC) 17 2 D-GND
(NC) 47 (NC) 18 (NC) 47 (NC) 18 1 5VD
(NC) 48 (NC) 19 (NC) 48 (NC) 19
VREF_M 49 (NC) 20 VREF_M 49 (NC) 20
(NC) 50 TH 21 (NC) 50 TH 21
nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 CN-3
nBD 52 D-GND 23 nBD 52 D-GND 23 S6B-PH-K-S 292172-5(AMP)
D-GND 53 5V_D 24 D-GND 53 5V_D 24 +24V 2 5 +24V
D-GND 54 D-GND 25 D-GND 54 D-GND 25 P-GND 3 4 P-GND
5V_LD 55 D-GND 26 5V_LD 55 D-GND 26 nPOLY_START 4 3 nPOLY_START
P-GND 56 (NC) 27 P-GND 56 (NC) 27 nPOLY_LOCK 5 2 nPOLY_LOCK
P-GND 57 nPOLY_CK 28 P-GND 57 nPOLY_CK 28 nPOLY_CK 6 1 nPOLY_CK
+24V 58 nPOLY_LOCK 29 +24V 58 nPOLY_LOCK 29
+24V 59 nPOLY_START 30 +24V 59 nPOLY_START 30
+3.3V 60 +3.3V 60
B. Operational descriptions
(1) General Main scanning direction
Image data sent from the LSU Mother PWB are converted into
REAR
laser beams and radiated onto the OPC drum surface. The LSU
unit is composed of : (1) the optical elements from the laser to the Scanning
polygon mirror, (2) the primary system including the mirror which direction
secures the optical path, (3) the optical elements including the poly-
gon mirror, and (4) the scanning system including the mirror which
secure the optical path.
(2) Composition
Primary system
BK
C
M
Y
FRONT
Paper exit
direction REAR
Scanning
direction
Scanning system
FRONT
Secondary
Primary transfer (4) transfer (6)
Before-transfer
charging (5)
Discharge (7)
OPC drum
Developing(3)
Charging (1)
Exposure (2)
In addition, the process control system is employed to maintain stable print image qualities.
Secondary
transfer unit
Before-transfer
charging unit (PTC)
OPC drum unit (Y) OPC drum unit (M) OPC drum unit (C) OPC drum unit (BK)
Name Content
OPC drum unit Generates electrostatic latent images with the main charger and the image laser beams.
Toner cartridge Supplies toner to the developing unit with the toner motor.
Developing unit Converts electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible toner images.
Primary transfer unit Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt.
Secondary transfer unit Transfers toner images from the primary transfer belt to paper.
Waste toner collection section Collects waste toner generated in the OPC drum section and the transfer section.
Image density sensor (Registration sensor) Detects the toner patch density on the primary transfer belt during operation of the process control
system. Detects the color shift amount.
MC/DV PWB Generates the main charger voltage and the DV bias voltage.
TC PWB Generates the transfer voltage.
Before-transfer charging unit (PTC) Charges toner so as to be easily transferred on paper.
C. C. C. C. C. C. C. C.
C. V. C. C.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
0IXEL COUNTER
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY 4# 07"
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
!
"
$6 UNIT )NMATE DENSITY
SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
4ONER DENSITY ROTATION SENSOR
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL
,IGHT QUANTITY CONTROL
,%$ CURRENT
CONTROL
0#5 07"
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
0IXEL COUNTER
b. High density process control operation (Toner patch generation and density correction operations)
1) When the machine enters the high density process control mode, the secondary transfer unit enters the free state.
2) While changing the DV bias voltage step by step, a number of toner patches in different densities are generated on the F side and the R
side of the primary transfer belt.
F side: The color toner patch is generated.
R side: The black toner patch is generated.
3) Each toner patch density is detected by the image density sensor, and the DV bias correction voltage is calculated in the PCU PWB so
that the proper density is obtained from the relation between the DV bias voltage at the time when each toner patch is made and the toner
patch density.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
"
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
!
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE " 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY
VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
!
$6 UNIT )NMATE DENSITY
SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
4ONER DENSITY ROTATION SENSOR
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
(IGH DENSITY PROCESS
#ALCULATION UNIT CONTROL DATA ,35 DISTORTION
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE CORRECTION TABLE 4EMPERATURE
-# GRID VOLTAGE HUMIDITY SENSOR
0IXEL COUNTER DATA
,35 0APER TYPE
TEMPERATURE 0APER SIZE
-&0 07"
(ALF TONE PROCESS CONTROL $UPLEX MODE
)MAGE DATA
DATA $ITHER CORRECTION
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER
(1) Toner patch electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum.
(2) The toner patch electrostatic latent images are developed and transferred on the primary transfer belt.
(3) Each toner patch density is detected by the toner density sensor.
(4) The DV bias correction value is calculated.
(5) The DV bias correction value is applied to the actual operation mode.
(6) The calculated DV bias voltage is applied to the actual operation mode.
3) Each toner patch density is detected by the image density sensor, and each toner patch density are compared with the reference gamma
to calculate the correction amount.
4) The dither pattern in the actual operation mode is generated in the MFP PWB with the reference gamma and the correction amount.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
0IXEL COUNTER DATA
,35 0APER TYPE
TEMPERATURE 0APER SIZE
-&0 07" $UPLEX MODE
(ALF TONE PROCESS CONTROL
DATA $ITHER CORRECTION
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER
(1) Toner patch electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum.
(2) The toner patch electrostatic latent images are developed and transferred on the primary transfer belt.
(3) Each toner patch density is detected by the toner density sensor.
(4) By comparing with the reference gamma, the correction value is calculated.
(5) The dither data in the actual operation mode are formed in the MFP PWB according to the correction value, and applied to the actual
operation mode.
The toner density sensor in this machine performs the following functions.
• Judges whether toner is supplied from the toner cartridge to the developing unit or not during rotation of the toner motor.
• Judges whether the toner density is abnormal or not.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
#
(IGH DENSITY PROCESS
#ALCULATION UNIT CONTROL DATA ,35 DISTORTION "
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE CORRECTION TABLE 4EMPERATURE
-# GRID VOLTAGE HUMIDITY SENSOR
0IXEL COUNTER
(1) The basic information of the toner density control is acquired. (2) The necessary toner supply quantity (toner motor rotation
• Temperature and humidity number) is calculated according to the basic information of the
toner density control. (PCU PWB)
• Print pixel number for every page
(3) The toner motor is rotated for the time corresponding to the
• High density process control data
calculated toner motor rotation number.
• Toner cartridge counter
(4) Toner is supplied from the toner cartridge to the developing
• Toner density sensor data
unit.
$//,''2:1 $//,'83
This is used to assure stable image qualities by executing proper
1250$/
operations of the process control according to the machine use sta-
tus.
b. SIM44-62 function and use
1) Changes the image density in the high density area.
2) Changes the execution frequency of the process control.
c. Setting method $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
1) Enter the SIM44-62 mode, and select the set item.
To change the image density in the high density area, select
PROCON TARGET. (Relation between the selected density level and the output image
density)
To change the frequency of the process control operations,
select PROCON MODE. CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease. (The C/M/Y high
density process control target values decrease.)
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase. (The C/M/Y high
ǂǂǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&216(77,1*&2//(&7,9(,1387
density process control target values increase.)
352&217$5*(7 352&2102'( BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high density process
control target value decreases.)
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high density process
control target value increases.)
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease. (The C/M/Y/K
high density process control target values decrease.)
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase. (The C/M/Y/K
high density process control target values increase.)
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K. (The C/M/Y/K
high density process control target values are the
standard values.)
(Relation between the selected density level and the SIM44-4 set values)
(Relation between the selected mode and the SIM44-28 set values)
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest version
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER "
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
"
4ONER !
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
" REFLECTION PLATE
#
$6 UNIT )NMATE DENSITY
SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
4ONER DENSITY ROTATION SENSOR
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL
"
0IXEL COUNTER DATA
,35 0APER TYPE
TEMPERATURE 0APER SIZE
-&0 07"
(ALF TONE PROCESS CONTROL $UPLEX MODE
)MAGE DATA
DATA $ITHER CORRECTION
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
"
(IGH DENSITY PROCESS
#ALCULATION UNIT CONTROL DATA ,35 DISTORTION !
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE CORRECTION TABLE 4EMPERATURE
-# GRID VOLTAGE HUMIDITY SENSOR
0IXEL COUNTER
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
"
0IXEL COUNTER
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE
,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
0IXEL COUNTER
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
0IXEL COUNTER
12
14
16
1
3
5
2
4
6
B7B-PASK-1
DL_BK
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_LD
1 INT24V1L
/DVM_K_CK
B28B-PHDSS
/DVM_CL_D
/DVM_K_LD
/DVM_K_D
DHPD_CL
2 P-GND
5VNPD+R
5VNPD+R
CN-16(1/2)
DHPD_K
(NC) 3 (NC)
MC-K
D-GND
D-GND
4 /DVM_K_CK
5 /DVM_K_D
DVM_K
(NC) 6 (NC)
7 /DVM_K_LD
48M108F060
SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
1 P-GND 1
2 INT24V1L 2 B7B-PASK-1
DL_M
DRV PWB CN3 3 INT24V1L 3 1 INT24V1L
MC
4 P-GND 4 2 P-GND
(NC) 3 (NC)
4 /DVM_CL_CK
2
5 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL
DL_C
(NC) 6 (NC)
2
D-GND 1 1 D-GND
MC-CL
MC
DL_Y# 3 (NC) 2 (NC)
D-GND 5 3 DL_Y#
3
DL_Y
DL_M# 7
FM_V 9 (NC) 51065-0300
D-GND 2 1 D-GND
DL_C# 4 (NC) 2 (NC)
D-GND 6 3 DL_M#
DL_BK# 8
FM_LD 10 (NC)
1
51065-0300
1 D-GND
(NC) 2 (NC)
3 DL_C#
2
51065-0300
3
1 D-GND
(NC) 2 (NC)
MC
3 DL_BK#
CN-9 (2/2)
1
B34B-PHDSS
1
GB
INT24V1 3
P-GND
PCU PWB
5
/HV_DATA#
7
/HV_CLK#
9
/HV_LD#
2
(1) Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
11
HV_REM#
3
13
MC_CL_ERR
MC
15
MC_BK_ERR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PS-187
GB
PS-250
MC_BK_ERR
MC_CL_ERR
B09B-PASK-1
MC-K MC-K
/HV_DATA#
HV_REM#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD#
INT24V1
4
P-GND
CN-1
PS-187
3
PS-250
MC PWB
MC-CMY MC-CMY
Wire jumper
Wire jumper
Wire jumper
Wire jumper
GB-M
GB-C
GB-K
GB-Y
GB
F. OPC drum section
GB
Signal name Name Function/Operation
DHPD_CL OPC drum rotation sensor (CL) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (CL).
DHPD_K OPC drum rotation sensor (BK) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (BK).
DL_BK Discharge lamp (K) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (K).
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (C).
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (M).
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (Y).
DVM_CL Developing motor (CL) Drives the developing/OPC drum section (CL).
DVM_K Developing motor (K) Drives the developing/black OPC drum (BK)/transfer section.
GB (Y, M, C, K) Grid (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
GB (K, M, C, Y) Main charger grid voltage (K, M, C, Y) The OPC drum surface charging voltage is controlled.
MC (Y, M, C, K) Main charger (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged.
MC-CL Main charger applying voltage (CL) The main charger is charged to generate negative electric charges.
MC-K Main charger applying voltage (K)
Laser beams
OPC drum
When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC
drum, positive and negative charges are generated.
Screen grid High voltage unit Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
Main corona unit anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- Electric charges remain at a position where laser beam are not
age applied to the screen grid. radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
Lens
#.
"" 0( + 3 "" 0($33
4.-?9?! 4.-?9?!
4.-?9?" 4.-?9?"
6 6 WITH &USE
6 6 WITH &USE
4.-?9 4.-?9?8!
4.-?9?8"
4.-?9?8"
4.-?9?8!
4.-?-?!
"" 0( + 3
4.-?-?"
4.-?-?!
6 WITH &USE
4.-?-?"
6 WITH &USE
6
4.-?-?8"
6
#25- 9 4.-?- 4.-?-?8!
4.-?-?8"
4.-?-?8!
#.
"" 0($33
4.-?#?!
"" 0( + 3 4.-?#?"
4.-?#?! 4.-?#?8!
4.-?# 4.-?#?"
6
4.-?#?8"
6 WITH &USE
6 6 WITH &USE
#25- - 4.-?#?8!
4.-?#?8"
6 WITH &USE
6 WITH &USE
4.-?+?!
"" 0( + 3
4.-?+?"
#25- # 4.-?+?!
4.-?+?"
4.-?+?8!
4.-?+?8"
6
6
4.-?+?8!
4.-?+?8"
0#5 07"
4.-?+
6.
#2-?#?#+
6.
#2-?#?#+
#2-?#?$4 #2-?#?$4
43(2 6 +
$ '.$
6.
$ '.$
6.
#2-?9?#+
#2-?9?$4
#2-?9?#+
#2-?9?$4
#.
"" 0($33
452#?
6
$6-?+?#+ "" 0!3+
$6-?+?$ ).46,
$6-?+?,$ 0 '.$
$6-?#,?#+ $6-?+?#+
$6-?#,?$ $6-?+?$
$6-?#,?,$
$6-?+?,$
-&
3-2 6 . 3-0 6 .#
0 '.$
).46,
$26 07" #. ).46,
0 '.$
H. Developing section
"" 0!3+
).46,
0 '.$
$6-?#,?#+
$6-?#,?$
$6-?#,?,$
-&
4#3?9
(1) Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
"3
4#3?-
3/2 2&# -'$,& 3. 2� 3/ 2* -
#32 0+. 2Z : 3 0(2
43'?- 43'?-
0#5 07"
6.!4#?6 6.!4#?6
"3
4#3?- 4#3?-
$ '.$ $ '.$
#.
"" #:7(+ #: 9
4#3?#
43'?- !
"3
6.!4#?6 !
4#3?- !
$ '.$ !
3/2 2&# -'$,& 3. 2� 3/ 2* -
#32 0+. 2Z : 3
0(2
43'?9 ! 43'?9 43'?9
6.!4#?6 ! 6.!4#?6 6.!4#?6
4#3?+
4#3?9 ! 4#3?9 4#3?9
"3
$ '.$ ! $ '.$ $ '.$
3/2 2&# -'$,& 3. 2� 3/ 2* -
$ '.$ " $ '.$ $ '.$
43'?+ "
6.!4#?6 " 3/2 2&# -'$,& 3. 2� 3/ 2* -
4#3?+ " #32 0+. 2Z : 3
$ '.$ " 0(2
43'?+ 43'?+
6.!4#?6 6.!4#?6
4#3?+ 4#3?+
$6-?#,
$ '.$ $ '.$
-# 07"
#. 7IRE JUMPER
"" 0!3+ "3 +
-#?"+?%22
-#?#,?%22 7IRE JUMPER
(6?2%- "3 #
(6?,$
452#?
(6?#,+
(6?$!4! 7IRE JUMPER
0 '.$ "3 -
).46
7IRE JUMPER
#.
$6-?+
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and trans-
ported by the mixing roller.
By stirring, toner and carrier are negatively charged by mechanical
friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
The toner sensor detects the toner supply state from the toner car-
tridge.
In this machine, the toner density is detected by the toner sensor,
but the toner supply operation is not controlled only by the toner
density detection result. The toner density control is performed
according to the process control data.
7
I. Transfer section
4
14
4
2
1
4
8
Wire jumper
1TC-Y
4
Wire jumper
1TC-M
TC PWB
8
Wire jumper
1TC-C
13
Wire jumper DF11-6DS-2C
(1) Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
5
CN-19 (2/3)
B08B-PASK-1 B34B-PHDSS
3
PTC_ERR 2 14 PTC_ERR
HV_REM# 3 12 HV_REM#
D-GND
/TC_LD# 4 10 /TC_LD#
/TC_CLK# 5 8 /TC_CLK#
4
/TC_DATA# 6 6 /TC_DATA#
PCU PWB
9
1TC-Y
PTC PTC CN10
B32B-PHDSS
10
/2TUD 5
/2TURC 7
16
1TC-M
24V3 19
12
D-GND 21
5VO TRAYD 23 QR/P4-32S-C(01) QR/P4-32P-C(01)
5VNPD+R 25 5 /2TUD 5
179228-3 5VNPD+R 27 6 5VNPD+R 6
/1TUD_CL 1 CN-18
7 /2TURC 7
1TUD_CL
D-GND 2 B22B-PHDSS
8 24V3 8
1 /1TUD_CL
1TC-C
5VNPD(with R) 3
VHPSG2481++-1 3 D-GND
5 5VNPD+R
2 /1TUD_K
4 D-GND
179228-3 6 5VNPD+R
/1TUD_K 1
SMP-08V-NC
SMP-08V-NC
D-GND 2 7 D-GND
1TC-K
15
9
5 24V3
5VNPD(with R) 3 5VN
1 /2TUD
2 D-GND
VHPSG2481++-1 11 CRM_K_CK#
4 /2TURC
13 CRM_K_DT#
17
15 D-GND
5
4
3 5VNPD+R 3
2
1
17 5VN
19 CRM_M_CK#
PTC
21 CRM_M_DT#
SMR-08V-N
2TC
1TURC_2
14 CRM_C_DT#
2 +24V3 2 16 D-GND
1TUD_K
1 /1TURC_2 1 18 5VN
20 CRM_Y_CK#
22 CRM_Y_DT#
2TUD
11
SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC
24V3
24V3
2 +24V3 2
CN-16(1/2)
/1TURC_2
/1TURC_1
/1TURC_1
/DVM_K_D
1 1
/DVM_K_LD
B28B-PHDSS
/DVM_K_CK
179228-3
1TURC_1
2
1
3
2
1
48M108F060
/DVM_K_LD 7
2TURC
8
9
7
10
15
13
11
SMP-02V-NC
/DVM_K_D
24V3
5
/2TUD
D-GND
/DVM_K_CK 4
/2TURC
5VNPD+R
DVM_K
B7B-PASK-1
2
1
SMR-02V-N
VHPSG2481++-1
Signal name Name Function/Operation
1TC (CMY) Primary transfer voltage (CMY) Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the OPC drum to
the transfer belt.
1TC (K) Primary transfer voltage (K) Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the OPC drum to
the transfer belt.
1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL) Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode. (Detection is made by combination of
1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals.)
1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK) Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode. (Detection is made by combination of
1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals.)
1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Controls separation of the primary transfer unit.
1TURC_2 Primary transfer separation clutch 2 Controls separation of the primary transfer unit.
2TC Secondary transfer belt voltage Flows the transfer current to the secondary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the primary
transfer belt to paper.
2TUD Secondary transfer position detector Detects the position (separation) of the secondary transfer unit.
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Controls separation of the secondary transfer unit.
DVM_K Developing motor (K) Drives the developing/black OPC drum (BK)/transfer section.
PTC PTC voltage High voltage for PTC
CN-17 (1/2)
14CZ-6H
BU-14P-TZ-S
14CZ-6H
REGS_R
B18B-CZWHK-B-1 05XR-6H-P
09CZ-6Y
5VNPD A-9 6 5VNPD 9 1 5VNPD
D-GND A-8 7 D-GND 8 2 D-GND
REGS_R_LED# A-7 8 REGS_R_LED# 7 3 REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R A-6 9 REGS_R 6 4 REGS_R
5VNPD A-5 10 5VNPD 5 05XR-6H-P
D-GND A-4 11 D-GND 4 1 5VNPD
REGS_F_LED# A-3 12 REGS_F_LED# 3 2 D-GND
REGS_F A-2 13 REGS_F 2 3 REGS_F_LED#
PCS_F A-1 14 PCS_F 1 4 REGS_F
5 PCS_F
PCU PWB
REGS_F/IMGDS
Primary transfer
output
C. V. C. C.
C. C. C. V. C. C.
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Remaining toner removed from the primary transfer belt is trans- 1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
ported to the waste toner collection section by the waste toner
transport screw.
Free position
#0&-
#0&-?#.4
#0&-?#,+
#0&-?,$
#0&-?$
-&
"" 0!3+
0&#?(0&#
6
3-2 6 .
(0&#
6
3-0 6 .#
137 "13::
4.&$
$ '.$
4.&$
0#5 07"
82 ( 0
0&#?(0&#
"" 0($33
#0&-?#.4
"" 0($33
#0&-?#,+
#0&-?,$
#0&-?$
#.
#.
6
6.
4.&$ 4.&$
$ '.$ $ '.$
#: (
TNFD
FUFM
1 TH_UM_IN 1
VHPLG248NL1-1 2 TH_UM_CS_IN 2
3 3 D-GND 3
D-GND
2 HLPCD
1 5VN
179228-3 Contact SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC
Signal name
1 TH_US_IN 1 CN-17 (2/2)
2 D-GND 2 19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN) 19R-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN) 14CZ-6H B28B-CZWHK-B-1
A-1 TH_UM_IN A-10 B-6 TH_UM_IN
A-2 TH_UM_CS_IN A-9 B-7 TH_UM_CS_IN
HLPCD
1 N-HL(LM) 1 A-3 D-GND A-8 B-8 D-GND
A-4 TH_US_IN A-7 B-9 TH_US_IN
SLR-01VF(WH) SLP-01V(WH)
A-5 D-GND A-6 B-10 D-GND
Contact SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC A-6 TH_LM_IN A-5
PCU PWB
B-11 TH_LM_IN
2
1 TH_LM_IN 1 A-7 D-GND A-4 B-12 D-GND
2 D-GND 2 (NC) A-8 – A-3 (NC) B-13 TH_UM2_IN
HL_UM/US
(NC) A-9 TH_UM2_IN A-2 B-14 D-GND
1 L-HL(UM) 1 (NC) A-10 D-GND A-1
2 L-HL(US) 2 RCZR-10V-PS 10CZ-6H
PRM
Fusing motor
TH_US_IN
VLP-02V(WH) VLR-02V(WH)
10. Fusing section
2 N-HL(US) 2
B6B-PH-K-S 1 N-HL(UM) 1 1 L-HL(UM) 1
TH_UM_IN
3 N-HL(US) 3
CN-12 3 24V3
Name
4 N-HL(UM) 4
B28B-PHDSS 4 24V3
5 N-HL(LM) 5
/PRM_/B 1 5 /PRM_B
6 F-GND 6
/PRM_/A 2 6 /PRM_A
P R
/PRM_B 3
CN-13
/PRM_A 4
HL_LM
3
D-GND
HLout_UM
B24B-PHDSS
TS UM
FUFM_V 19
/FUFM CNT(Reserve) 21 (NC)
7
9
11
13
WH
8
P-GND 23
FUFM_LD 25
24V3 (with Fuse) 27
D1.25-M3(Ni) SRA-51T-4
1
2
3
4
CN-4
WEBEND
CN-2
8
B02P-VL
GND
B4B-PASK-1
1 Live_HL(main)
2 Live_HL(Sub)
HLout_US
HLout_UM
HLout_UM
YLP-02V(WH)
TS US
2 L-HL(US)
1 L-HL(UM)
VHPLG248NL1-1
1
CN-3
1
2
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
B3P5-VH-B
D-GND
5VNPD
1 Neutral_Main
WEBEND
PCU PWB
YLR-02VF(WH)
3 Neutral_Sub
TS LM
3
2
1
8
5 Neutral_Low
179228-3
9
19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN)
8
5VN B-1 B-9 5VN B-1
/WEBEND B-2 B-8 /WEBEND B-2
HL PWB
6
5
TH_LM_IN
7
CN-13
09CZ-6H
B24B-PHDSS
1 5VN
3 HLPCD
5 D-GND
15 /FUM_CK
4
17 /FUM_D
1
19 /FUM_LD
19R-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN)
Function/Operation
SMR-03 V-N SMP-03V-NC
1 FUFM_V 1
WEBS
2 FUFM_LD 2
3 P-GND 3
SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
1 24V3 1
2 WEBS 2
48M108F060(NIDEC)
FUFM
7
7 FUM_LD
6 5VN
5 /FUM_D
4 /FUM_CK
B7B-PASK-1
FUM
Signal name Name Function/Operation
HL_LM Heater lamp (HL_LM) Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM/US Heater lamp (HL_UM/US) Heats the fusing roller (F1), and fusing belt.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Detects the fusing pressure state.
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure.
TH_LM_IN Fusing temperature sensor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (B).
TH_UM_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing belt.
TH_US_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt.
TS LM Thermostat LM Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS UM Thermostat UM Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated. (Center section)
TS US Thermostat US Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated. (Edge section)
WEBEND Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.
Fusing belt
Web sheet
Backup roller
Feed side
HLPCD
SPM
(SPUM)
CN B PHR-12 179228-3
2
SPED 1 1 SPED
GND2 2 2 GND2
+5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
+5VPD 4 GP1S73P2
SPPD1 5
GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
B12B-PH-K-S 1 +5VPD
2 SPPD1 1
3 GND2
SPPD1 SPED
GP1A73
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
179228-3 GP1S73P2
CN H PHR-10
+5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
SPLS2 5
+5V_SPLS2 6
AVCC 7 179228-3 GP1S73P2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2
N.C. 10 3 +5VPD SPLS2
B10B-PH-K-S
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND2 3 GY GND2
4
GND2 5
SOCD 6 GP1A73
GND2 7 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N 179228-3(BLACK)
+5V SOCD 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
7
B8B-PH-K-S 2 SPPD3 2 2 SPPD3
3 GND2 3 3 GND2
4 SOCD 4
1
(2) Transport/paper exit section
5 GND2 5
6 +5V SOCD 6
GP1S73P2
10
179228-3
1 SOCD
2 GND2
3 +5V SOCD
6
SPPD2
8 9
CN D PHDR-10VS-2
SCOV
+5VPD 2
SPPD4 4
SPFM
GND2 6
GND2 7 179228-3(BLACK) GP1A73
STMPU 8 1 +5VPD
STMPS
STMPS/ 9 2 SPPD4
+24VPD STMPS 10 3 GND2
B10B-PHDSS-B
SPPD4
CN F PHR-6 PHR-6R
SPFMA/ 1 6 SPFMA/
+24VPD_SPFM 2 5 +24VPD_SPFM
SPFMA 3 4 SPFMA
SPFMB 4 3 SPFMB
+24VPD_SPFM 5 2 +24VPD_SPFM
SPFMB/ 6 1 SPFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
CN B PHR-12 179228-3(BLACK) GP1A73
1 +5VPD
8 2 SPPD5
9 3 GND2
10
+24V SCOV SW 12
B12B-PH-K-S Cover switch
PS-187/SPS-01T-187
2 +24VPD SCOV
1 SCOV SW
Signal name Name Function/Operation
SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPFM RSPF transport motor Transports a document.
SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass.
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3 Detects paper pass.
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4 Detects paper exit and switchback.
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the paper exit roller
(RSPF) pressure when reversing paper.)
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the finish stamp.
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Document size detection RSPF unit
Size detection on the document tray
The document width is detected with the RSPF document width
sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the
RSPF document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document
size is judged from the document width and the document length SPWS
according to the table below. When documents of different sizes
are mixed and set on the document tray, the largest document size SPLS1
is detected.
SPLS2
Document length sensor
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF (2) Document scanning
A4R ON OFF
The document scanning mode is available in 400dpi and 600dpi.
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
Resolution Document transport speed
A3 ON ON
400dpi 259mm/sec
11" x 17" ON ON
600dpi 173mm/sec
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
sure is released.
5) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is
pressed. (Solenoid ON)
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller 6) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet)
is pressed. (Stamp solenoid ON)
d. Stamp operation
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
02/&- 03&-
0/&-
0/&-
&5&-
02/&-
The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.
Filter process fan motor 1 produces an air flow to generate a difference in the air pressure between inside outside of the developing unit, pre-
venting toner from splashing from the open port of the developing unit.
The toner filter prevents toner from leaking from the slit caused by this difference in air pressure.
*1: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Mainte-
nance count (B/W, COL)).
*3: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Developer
count (B/W, COL)).
*4: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Total count
(B/W, COL)).
F. RSPF/Scanner counter
Counter name Display SIM Reset SIM Count-up timing NOTE
RSPF counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When SPF document discharge is completed. Number of discharge of document from the
The front surface in duplex scan is counted SPF
when the reverse operation is stopped.
Scan counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the scanner carriage feed is completed. Number of times of scan
Finish stamp counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the stamp is ON. Number of use of the finish stamp
Cover open/close counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the document cover close is detected. Number of open/close of the cover
Home detection counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the home sensor ON is detected. Number of detection of the home position
Scanner lamp lighting time SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the scanner lamp is lighted. Scanner lamp lighting time
counter
5 6 3 ) 8 1 ,7
237,21
' ( 5 ,9 ( 5 < 8 1 ,7 670 36 633' 62 & '
32 ' 6+32 6
)8 0 3 2 ) 0 B 350
7 2 1 ( 5 B. 8 1 ,7 7 2 1 ( 5 B& 8 1 ,7 7 2 1 ( 5 B0 8 1 ,7 7 2 1 ( 5 B< 8 1 ,7
3 6 )0 5 6 3 ) 3 : %
1. Block diagram
6 & $ 1 1 ( 5 8 1 ,7 237,21
32 0 $ 8 ' ,7 2 5
) 8 6 ( 5 8 1 ,7 31 &
5 ( * ,6 7 6 ( 1 6 2 5 0 $ ,1 ' 5 ,9 ( 8 1 ,7
$'80
8 1 ,7
: (% 6 : (% (1 ' 2 & 6:
5 ( * 6 B) /(' / ( ' ' 5 ,9 ( 5
7 8 ' B& /
3 & 6 B) 3: % 3: %
' 9 0 B. ' + 3 ' B. 7 8 5 & B ' 9 0 B& / ' + 3 ' B& / 7 8 5 & B
2 5 6 B/ ( ' 237,21
7 + B8 0
&&'
5 ( * 6 B5 7 8 ' B. 6& 8 : + B6 & 1
+ / B8 0 3: %
3: % 2 5 6 3 '
7 + B8 6
0 ,0
550 + / B8 6 2 3 ( 5 $ 7 ,2 1 8 1 ,7
7 + B8 0
0 +36 72 8 & +
[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION
+ / B/0 3 5 2 )0 3 $ 1 (/
3 )0
7 + B/0 /9 ' 6
+ 3 )& 3: %
' / B. ' / B& ' / B0 ' / B<
/& '
' 6 : B) 3& 8 2 3 ( 3 : %
' 5,9 ( 5 3 : % ' 9 B. 8 1 ,7 ' 9 B& 8 1 ,7 ' 9 B0 8 1 ,7 ' 9 B< 8 1 ,7
3: %
8 6 % & 1 3 : %
' 6 : B5 7 & 6 B. 7 & 6 B& 7 & 6 B0 7 & 6 B<
/ 6 8 0 2 7 + ( 5 3 : %
+''
33'
0 )3 &
237,21
7 1 )' 3: %
7 5,3 / ( & $ 6 6 ( 7 7 ( ' ( 6 .
&66
5 ,* + 7 ' 2 2 5 8 1 ,7 QG& $ 6 6 ( 7 7 (
3 $ 3 ( 5 ) ( ( ' 8 1 ,7 & 66
5 ' ,) 3 $ 3 ( 5 ) ( ( ' 8 1 ,7 / 6 8 8 1 ,7
& 63' & 3 )'
3: % /6 8 B7 +
& 3 )' 0 & 3 : %
237,21 & 63'
& 3 )0 & /8 ' % ' 3 : %
7 )' ' 6 : B$ ' 8 & /8 ' /'
& 3 )& 3: %
3* 0
& 3 )& & 3 ('
3573' 32 ' & 3 ('
0 3 )6 7 8 '
$33'
237,21 3& , ),1,6 + ( 5
$33' 7 8 5 & : + B' ( 6 . ' (6.
:+ ,1 1 ( 5
3& , ) ,1 ,6 + ( 5
'& 36
'& 36
0 3 /'
0 6: 5 ($ & 72 5
0 3: 6
0 $ 1 8 $ / 9
3 $ 3 ( 5 ) ( ( '
7+ +8 ' 8 1 ,7 237,21
: + 3 : %
$ & : + 3 : %
25
237,21 $ & 3 : %
: + 6 :
$ & : + 3 : %
$ & ,1
& /2 & . / RDGFRQWURO2 XWSXW
' & 0 RWRU& RQWURO 3 & 6 6 7 8 5 & B7 8 5 & Bࠉ' 9 & 5 8 B. & 0 < 0 3 ) 6
,& ' 9 0 RWRU% . ' 9 0 B. ) 8 & 5 8 7 8 5 & 7 1 & 5 8 B. & 0 < 5 5 & 3 ) & $ ' 8 &
,& / RDG& RQWURO2 XWSXW / RDGFRQWURO2 XWSXW
,& % XV ((3 5 2 0 ' 9 0 RWRU& / ' 9 0 B& /
B. PCU PWB
5 ( 6 ( 7 ,& & RLQYHQGRU & 3 ) & & 3 ) & & 3 8 &
NELW ) XVHU0 RWRU ) 8 0 ) $ 1 0 RWRU& RQWURO
2 SWLRQDO & 3 8 & + 3 ) &
3 RZ HU6 XSSO\) $ 1 3 6 ) 0 B9
) XVHU) $ 1 ) 8 ) 0 B9
0 RWRU& RQWURO
3 HSHU2 XWSXW) $ 1 3 2 ) 0 B9
$ GGUHVV% XV>@ & / 8 0 & / 8 0
,& 3 URFHVV) $ 1 3 5 2 ) 0 B9
; RU; & 3 ) 0 B'
' $ 7 $ % XV>@ ) / $ 6 + 5 2 0
; WDO 0 ELW 0 RWRU& RQWURO
0 + ] ) $ 1 0 RWRU& RQWURO
' 9 0 RWRU. ' 9 0 B. B'
3 URFHVV) $ 1 3 5 2 ) 0 B9
' 9 0 RWRU& / ' 9 0 B& / B'
) XVHU0 RWRU ) 8 0 B'
,&
65$0 6 HQVRU,QSXW
:ULWH3URWHFW
0 ELW 7 1 ) ' & 6 6 6 ( 7 ' 6 : B& ' 6 : B&
& 3 ( ' & 3 ( ' ' 6 : B) ) 8 7 < 3 B 6 HQVRU,QSXW
7 8 ' B. 7 8 ' B& / + / 3 & '
0 RWRU/ RFN' HWHFW ' 6 : B5 ' 9 7 < 3 6 ( / B< 0 & .
,& & 3 ) 0 B/ ' 3 6 ) 0 B/ ' 3 5 2 ) 0 B/ '
' & 3 RZ HU & 3 /'
6 XSSO\ ): 0 RWRU/ RFN' HWHFW
& /2 & .
' 9 0 B& / B/ ' ' 9 0 B. B/ ' ) 8 ) 0 B/ '
) 8 0 B/ ' 3 2 ) 0 B/ ' 3 2 ) 0 B/ ' ࠉ3 5 2 ) 0 B/ '
,& % XV
+ 9 HUURUGHWHFW
, 0 & B% . B( 5 5 0 & B& / B( 5 5 3 7 & B( 5 5
,2 $ 6,&
7 R6 & 1 FQW
7 R0 ) 3 & 8$57
+9 ) $ 1 0 RWRU& RQWURO
Z LUHGVHULDO 0 & 7 & XQLW 3 URFHVV) $ 1 3 5 2 ) 0
3 URFHVV) $ 1 3 5 2 ) 0
3: 0 3 DSHU2 XWSXW) $ 1 3 2 ) 0
,&
3 0 & $ 6,& 3 DSHU2 XWSXW) $ 1 3 2 ) 0
,& % XV & 580 ) XVHU) $ 1 ) 8 ) 0
7 R/ 6 8 0 RWKHU 8$57 ,& & 5 8 0 B. & 0 <
& 38
+ 6 ' UXP / DP S
' / B. & 0 <
) XVHUXQLW + / FRQWURO
+ / B8 0 / 0 8 6
7 R/ '
2 SWLRQDO 6 HQVRU,QSXW
' + 3 ' B& / . 3 3 ' & / 8 ' & / 8 ' ࠉ& 3 ) ' & 3 ) '
6 + 2 3 6 3 2 ' 3 2 ' 3 2 ' 7 ) ' 7 ) ' 3 3 '
& 6 6 & 6 6 7 8 ' $ 3 3 ' $ 3 3 ' 0 3 / '
& RLQYHQGRU 2 SWLRQDO ' 6 : B$ ' 8 3 5 7 3 ' 0 3 ( ' & 6 3 ' & 6 3 '
),1,6 + ( 5 8$57 6 HQVRU,QSXW
0LFURZLUH
6 HQVRU,QSXW & 9 B& / & 2 3 < & 9 B& 2 3 < ) XVHU7 KHUP LVWRURSHQGHWHFW
㻹 㻲㻼 㻯㻌㻼 㼃 㻮
㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻺
㻿㼘㼕㼐㼑 㻿㻰㻴㻯
㻿㼃 㻠 㻳㻮
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻿㻰 㻼㻯㻵㼑
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠 㻿㼛㼏㼗㼑㼠 㻰 㻰 㻾㻟 㻌 㻻 㼚 㻌 㻮 㼛 㼍 㼞 㼐 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌
㻠㻤 㻜㻹 㼎㼜㼟 㻞㻳 㻮
㻳㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠 㻠㼜㼛㼞㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠 㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺 㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜
㻔㻾㼑㼍㼞㻕
㻢㻹㻮㻛㻿㼑㼏
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟
㻿㻼㻵㻛㻿㻰 㻿㻭㼀㻭㻌㻵㻲
㻿㻰㻴㻯㻌㻯㼘㼍㼟㼟㻢
㻵㻲
㻯㻺㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
㻳㻼㻵㻻 㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲
㻴㼛㼟㼠 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟
㻝㻳㼎㼜㼟 㻿㼛㻯䜈
㻸㻭㻺 㻌㻶㻭㻯 㻷 㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻾㻶㻠㻡 㻺㼛㼚㻙㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㼞㼡㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼍㼞㼑㼍 㻸㻯㻰㻯㻌㻵㻲 㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻔㻻㻺㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㻸㻭㻺㻌㼟㼠㼍㼚㼐㼎㼥㻕 㻟㻟㻚㻞㻢㻹㻴㼦
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻳㻹㻵㻵 㻿㻯㻺㻌㻵㻲
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻼㻴㼅 㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳 㻟㻥㻚㻟㻞㻞㻹㻴㼦
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷 㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲 㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻕 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻮㻌㻯㻺 㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㻾㼑㼡㼟 㻸㻿㼁㻌㻵㻲 㻟㻞㻹㻴㼦
㻸㻿㼁
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟 㻸㼂㻰㻿
㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻌㻯㻸㻷㻒㻿㼅㻺㻯㻕
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻟㻞㻹㻴㼦
㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀 㻔㻝㻛㻠㼏㼔㻕
㻔㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀㻕 㻼 㻻㻲
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵 㻞 㻯㻔 㻝㻛 㻟 㼏㼔 㻕
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞 㻵 㻞 㻯 㻌 㻥 㻡 㻷㻴 㼦
㻵㻺㼀㻔㼃㼍㼘㼑㼁㼜㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵 㻞 㻯 㻔㻞 㻛 㻟 㼏 㼔 㻕
㻾㼀㻯 㻼㻵㻯 㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞 㻵㻞㻯 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻿㼘㼑㼑㼜㻕
㻵㻺㼀 㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦 㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞 㻹㼕㼏㼛㼚㻚
㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵 㻞 㻯㻔 㻟㻛 㻟㼏 㼔 㻕 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞 㻵㻞㻯 㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎
㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦 㻲㻭㼄㻔㻝㼟㼠㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯 㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟
㻯㻼 㻸㻰
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳 㻔㻝㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻵㻲 㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟
㻰㻿㼁㻮㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾 㻵㻯㻌 㻒㻌 㻼 㻯 㻵 㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻾㻿㻞㻟㻞㻯
㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘
㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻠㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝 㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹 㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻞㻚 㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟 㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀 㻔㻰㻿㻷㻌㼛㼜㼠㻚㻕
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻝
㻔 㼂 㼑 㼚 㼐㼑 㼞 㻕 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻞
㻔 㻰㼑 㼎㼡㼓 㻕 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻯㻺㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲
㻳㻼 㻵 㻻
㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕
㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕㻌 㻸㻿㼁㻌㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻺 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕 㻵 㻞㻯㻔 㻝㻛㻞 㼏 㼔 㻕 㻸 㼛 㼏 㼍㼘 㻌 㻮 㼡 㼟 㻸㼛㼓㼕㼏㻌㻵㻯 㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹 㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞 㻵㻲 㻔㻭㼐㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㻲㼑㼠㼏㼔㻌㻒㻌㻿㼑㼜㼍㼞㼍㼠㼑㻕 㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀 㻔㻼㼞㼛㼓㼞㼍㼙㻕
㻿 㻻㻯 㻸 㼛 㼏 㼍㼘 㻌 㻮 㼡 㼟
㻼㻝㻜㻝㻟
㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻝㻛㻞㼏㼔㻕 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻔㼁㻭㻾㼀㻕
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻿㻻㻙㻰㻵㻹㻹 㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻿㻻㻙㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻻㼜㼠㻚㻌㻞㻳㻮 㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀 㻰 㻰 㻾㻟 㻙 㻢 㻢 㻣 㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐 㻵㻲 㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯 㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻌㻯㻺
㻝 㻳㻮 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜 㻾㻳㻹㻵㻵 㻔 㻱 㼠 㼔㼑 㼞 㻕
D. Scanner control PWB
㻟㻚㻟䠲
㻝㻚㻤䠲
&&'䠢
0DLQXQLWVLGH 㼀㼞
㻝㻜䠲 㼀㼞
㼀㼞 㻭㻲㻱㻛㼀㻳
㻟㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰 㼀㼞 㻯㻼㼁㻯㻸㻷
㼀㼞 㻿㻯㻺㼏㼚㼠 㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼎㼡㼒
㻔㻤㻹㼤㻝㻢㼎㼕㼠㻕
㼀㼞 㻭㻲㻱㼋㻯㻿 㻝㻥㻚㻢㻢㻝㻹㻴㼦 㻯㻸㻷 㻝㻢
㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾 㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼎㼡㼒
㻔㻤㻹㼤㻝㻢㼎㼕㼠㻕
㻝㻢
䠿䡈䡇
㻾㼤㻌㻲㻼㻰㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗
㻾㻳㻮 㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㻟㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌㼎㼡㼟 㻸㻿㼁㻙㼙㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞
㻝㻜䠲㻛㻡䠲㻛㻟䠲
㻿㻯㻺 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯
㻭㻿㻵㻯 㼀㼤
㻟㻚㻟䠲 㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
6HULDOV\VWHPV 㻝㻚㻡䠲 㻾㻳㻮
㻯㻿㻟
㻾㻿㻼㻲㻌㼁㻺 㻵㻼㻰㻛㻵㻰㻻㻯㻯
㻝㻞䊻㻝㻜䠲 㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻝㻜㼂
㻝㻞䊻㻡䠲 㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻡㼂
㻡䊻㻟㻚㻟䠲 㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻯㻿㻠
㻡㼂㻻 㻝㻚㻞䠲
㻯㻼㼁㻯㻸㻷
㻹㼕㼞㼞㼛㼞 㻟㻚㻟䠲
㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾 㻞㻠㼂 㻚㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞 㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾 㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻞㻠㼂
㻡㼂㻺 㻸㻱㻰 㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹
2WKHU,&V 㻸㻱㻰 㻱㻞㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻔㻻㻺㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐㻕
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞 㻞㻠㼂
㻡㼂㻺 㻯㻿㻜㼛㼞㻯㻿㻢
㻹㻴㻼㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㼟㻌㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㼠㼔㼍㼚㻌㻿㻼㻱㻰㻘㻌㻿㻻㻯㻰 㻡㼂㻺
㻡㼂㻼㼃㻹
㻻㻯㻿㼃
㻡㼂㻺 㻯㻿㻞 㻯㻿㻜
㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹
7R/68PRWKHU 㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻔㻰㻵㻹㻹㻕
㻯㻼㼁
㻡㼂㻻 㻾㻿㻼㻲㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞 㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟
㻡㼂㻼㼃㻹 XDUWHWF
㻿㻼㻱㻰
㻯㻿㻡
7R/68PRWKHU
㻴㻯㻝㻡㻝
㻿㻱㻸㼋㻭㻛㻮㻛㻯
6HQVRUV
㻡㼂㻺
㻹㼀㻼㻌㻵㻯
/9'63:% 㻻㻾㻿䚷㻸㻱㻰
㻞㻠㼂
䞉/&'NLQGGHWHFWLRQ
㻼㻺㻸㼋㻿㻱㻸㻜
㻭㼡㼐㼕㼠㼛㼞㻔㼀㻮㻰㻕
㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㻯㻼㼁 㻼㻺㻸㼋㻿㻱㻸㻜
㻛㻯㻯㻲㼀
䠨䠟䠠 㼚㻸㻯㻰㼋㻰㻵㻿㻼
㻳㻱㻞㻌㻦㻌㻣㼕㼚㼏㼔 㻔㻌㻻㻺㻛㻻㻲㻲㻌㻕
㻭㻾㻞㻌㻦㻌㻝㻜㻚㻝㼕㼏㼚 䠮䡔
5*% 㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
㻰㻯㻰㻯 㻡㼂㻺
㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻡㼂
㻞㻠㼂 㻸㻯㻰㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞
'RFXPHQWVL]H
/(' 㻸㻱㻰 㻞㻠㼂 OLJKWUHFHSWLRQ 㻡㼂㻺
%DFNOLJKW 㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻛㻷㻱㼅㻵㻺
㻷㻱㼅㻌㻯㻻㻺 7R/68PRWKHU
㻡㼂㻼㼃㻹 㻡㼂㻼㼃㻹
㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻡㼂㻻
㻺㻵㻺㻲㻻㼋㻸㻱㻰
1XPHULFDONH\SDGRURWKUHV 㻺㻼㼃㻾㻿㼃
㻼㻻㼃㼋㻸㻱㻰
㼃㼁㼋㻸㻱㻰 㻡㼂㻻
㻺㼃㼁㼋㻷㻱㼅
㻡㼂㻻
%X]]HU 㻛㻮㼆㻾 㻞㻠㼂 㻞㻠㼂 3RZHU
VXSSO\
/('PDWUL[ /('GULYH
FLUFXLW 㻝㻞㼂 㻝㻞㼂
㻝㻞㼂
,1)2B/(' )$;UHFHSWLRQ/('
㻟㻚㻟㼂
:8B.(< 5HWXUQNH\ 㻟㻚㻟㼂
:8B/(' 5HVHWNH\/('
32:B/(' 0DLQSRZHU/('
㻡㼂㻺
:8B.(< 5HVHWNH\ 㻡㼂
㻿㻯㼋㻭㻯㻷 3&8
㻼㻯㼁㼋㻾㻱㻽
86%&13:%
RSTB
STBYB /CCFT
SHLR
UPDN RB10
DITH DISP_out nLCD_DIS
Vcom R
V1 - V10 Gamma circuit 10VA R1240N001B-TR-FE
IC5
10VA 24V
10VA R1283K002C-TR PST8427UR
3.3V IC2 IC6
-7VGL 3.3V RSTB 3.3V
TPC8124 PST8427UR
QB3 IC4
15VGH VGL_EN 3.3V
RP131S331D-E2-F PST8427UR
ICB1 ICB3
S3B-PH-SM MAX16822 LVDS_EN 3.3V
Junction connector CN2 ICB2
LED_A 24V 3.3V_LVDS
PST8427UR
LED_K ICB5 RP131S331D-E2-F
CCFT 3.3V_LVDS ICB4
Wire harness 3.3V +5V
52271-0469 CCFT DISP_out
CN3-2
Touch panel /YL(Y1) /YL(Y1)
XH(X1) XH(X1)
/XL(X2) /XL(X2)
YH(Y2) YH(Y2)
KEY PWB
CN1 CN CN CN
BPR LED Wire harness
etc
Home key IC
etc
Buzzer
Power-saving
LED
BM16B-ZESS-TBT
BM03B-PASS-TFT
Japan only Wire harness
CN1 CN CN CN
SHIELD1
Wire harness
GND
D1+
D1-
VBUS1
BM05B-PASS-TFT
OPTION
PALR-06V /PAP-06V-S Junction connector CN CN
Wire harness
Keyboard
USB
Wire harness
F. LSU-mother PWB
6&1B'$7$
6&1B&/.
7;'B6&15;'B6&1&76B6&1576B6&15(6B6&1
8$57
/&'B'$7$
/&'B&/.
/&'B',63
/&'B6(/
7;'B3,&5;'B3,& /9'6
5(4B3,&5(4B3,&B,17&/5B3,&
32)B6&1 2&
8$57 6&1
:8B)$; FQW
0)3 2&
2& 32)B0)3
62&' 563)B23(1
5HVHW
5HVHW,QSXW 5HVHW,&
563)
3,&93321
63('
$1<B.(< .(<B,1
3,&
3:5B.(<
7;'B3&8 3,&)
5;'B3&8
&76B3&8
576B3&8 :8B.(<
86%&RQWUROOHU 5(6B3&8
86%3RUW 8$57 32:B/(' 2&
.H\ERDUG)URQW 26&
6\VWHP&. 23(
5HDURWKHU :8B/(' 2&
)$;B,1)2 2&
'&36
'&&17 2&
7KHUPLVWRU2XWSXW 7KHUPLVWHU
$03
,'>@ 7+
5HVHW,QSXW 5HVHW,& 5HVHW
0RWRU&RQWURO 3*0B&.
3&8 3*0B67$57
-2%(1'B,17 3RO\JRQ 3*0B%5$.(
2&
3&8,) 0RWRU 3RO\JRQ
3*0B/2&.
&RQWURO 0RWRU
5HJLVWHU
6&. HWF
569B'$7
75$16B567
)$1
&RQWURO
6\QFKURQRXV6HULDO
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ 6&/
6'$
75$16B'$7 :3 ,&%86
&20B),)2
&/.B&B(1
/68B$6,& &/.B0B(1
5DFRRQ &/.B$B(1
26& 66
6<6&/.
6HULDO,)
6\VWHP&. '$B&/.
/'&RQWURO
'$B'7 9UHI .&0<
6HULDO '$B/' 6HULDO
'$,) '$
/'B&+.
1.. 5
'7B.
'//,,1
&KDQQHO$.
0)3 '7B0
))33'
&KDQQHO%0
'7B&
&KDQQHO&&
'7B<
&KDQQHO'<
9,'(2,)B$&7
PROGRAM
ASPCLK FLASH ROM
ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
16Mb
G. FAX section
+5VA +5V
+5VA
Filter
FAX_RXD(D)+
FAX_RXD(D)-
CI
CI- FAX_TXD(D)+
Detection FAX_TXD(D)-
Polarity FAX_CTS(D)-
HS1-
inversion
FAX ASIC FAX_RTS(D)-
Detection HS2-
(Not mount) FAX_RXD(CS)+
MB87F4930 FAX_RXD(CS)-
CION FAX_TXD(CS)+
FAX_TXD(CS)-
150VON FAX_CTS(CS)-
S relay
FLV PP
MJ2
(TEL) MSGMUTE
EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG JTAG
MRON
Connector
14pin
SON1 (Not mount)
CPU
CID-
Download Log SH7706 Voltage
UART 1.9V Regulator 3.3V
Connector
+24V (Not mount) R1173S001B
PIC +12 PICPGM_EN
+12V +24
CI Fi ter microcomputer Spred
UART Crystal
CI Fi ter PIC16F690 Spectrum Resonator
+5V2
CY25811SXCT 14.7456MHz
SON2
WUP_FAX-
voltage TELID
Operation in 1W/7W level
energy-save mode voltage TELID2
level
0#5 3#.#NT ,35 -/4(%2 -&0#
2X$ 05 05 5!24"?48$
2"?48$?3#.
3CHMIT )NV / #
05 5!24"?28$
#05 4X$
2"?28$?3#.
0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV
(3 !;= 05 05 5!24"?243?.
#0,$ 2"?243?3#.
/#
$;= 3CHMIT )NV
%0-4#. 05 5!24"?#43?.
2"?#43?3#.
0$ 05 3CHMIT )NV
4 X$ 05 5!24"?28$
N0#5?2X$ 2"?28$?0#5
0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV
2X$ 05 05 5!24"?48$
N0#5?4X$ 2"?48$?0#5
3CHMIT )NV / #
)/PORT 05 5!24"?#43?.
N0#5?$32 2"?#43?0#5
0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV
05 05 5!24"?243?.
)/PORT
2"?243?0#5
H. SERIAL COMMUNICATION
N0#5?$42
3CHMIT )NV /#
05 2X$
4X$
42!.3?$!4
0$ 3CHMIT )NV 3CHMIT )NV
$;=
&!8 2"?243?&!8$
05 /# 3CHMIT )NV
#0,$ 3AMEASST &!8 5!24"?#43
!;=
2"?#43?&!8$
3CHMIT )NV 3CHMIT )NV 05
%0-4#. 5!24"?243
2"?243?&!8#3
05 /# 3CHMIT )NV
5!24"?#43
2"?#43?&!8#3
05
2"?'0)?#43?0#) 0/24"
05
2"?'0/?243?0#) 0/24"
/PTIONAL 05
0-#!3)# 2"?48$?0#) 5!24"?48$
0#)35" 2"?28$?0#) 5!24?28$
50$'. 05
2"?$42?0#) 0/24"
05
2"?$32?0#) 0/24"
05
2"??#43?2)# 5!24?#43?.
05
2"??243?2)# 5!24?243?.
/PTIONAL 23# 05
23# 2"?48$?2)# 5!24"?48$
#OIN6ENDOR0#) 2"?28$?2)# 5!24?28$
$RIVER 0/24"
2"?$42?2)#
$RIVER 05
2"?$32?2)# 0/24"
'&32:(56833/< )
3&,'&32:(56833/< 237,21 5HDFWRU
9RO W DJH
)$+9 &RQYHU VL RQ
9R
%' ' 9/
)
a
a
a
a
7$9
9RO W DJH
&RQYHU VL RQ )
9 3&, 1) 59 7$+9
1)
A. AC power line diagram
9RO W DJH
) &RQYHU VL RQ
2. Power line diagram
9
, 179
9
)$+9 9
9'(6.
9
(1) AC power line diagram (230V)
91
$& 3: % 9
. )
0$,132:(56: 7$+9
$&,1 )
) 3$77(51*$3
/
3$77(51*$3
7$+9
,179
$
$ 95
59 ):
3$77(51*$3 *HQHU DW L QJ
&L U FXL W
)
)
1
+/B35
7$+9 3$77(51*$3
:+
3:% 237,21
+/3:%
) /
/ /
/
)
7$+9 7$+9
1&
:+B&17
12
9
5<
:+6:
GUDZHU
+/B86 +/B/0
/&& '(6. '(6. 0DLQ8QLW 6&1
+HDWHU +HDWHU +HDWHU +HDWHU +HDWHU 7+(50267$7 7+(50267$7
237,21 76B86 76B/0
: : : : :
:$50+($7(56(7 237,21
6&1FQW 3:% 81
9 %=5
9
3$1(/ 81 $5,(6
'6:5
92
)80
92B'XW\
'5,9(53:% 81 3:6: 3:%
%=5
9
'90B%.
,179/ &&'3:% 81
)(7 $OCUMENT WIDTH SENSOR /'2
2USH '&'& $9 9
9 &75/B$9 $9 9
PREVENTION &%4
$9 9B/&'
&75/B$9 '&'& $9
B. DC power line diagram
)(7
&%4 FOR RUSH ,179
PREVENTION
/./&& 9 9 /(' /&' LQFK
7U 6 CLUTCH
9
.(<%2$5'
92 92B'XW\
/(''59 /('
0,0
,17B&17 3:%81 3:%81
).&/?,%$&!8 RECEPTION ,%$ 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
92 92B'XW\ 92 )521786%
/68027+(5 3:% 81
7U 91 59B+8% 86%
+8% 9+'
)(7 )(7 ,&&$5' 5($'(5
9 '&'&
0)33:% 81
'5,9(5
+''
3,&
0/&?-&0# 0)# CONTROL
8$57 2%1?0)# 0)# CONTROL
62&
2%1?0)#?).4 0)# CONTROL
&!8?750 ,35 -OTHER 0)# CONTROL
$# 0/7%2 07" 5. 3$1(/ 81 *(0,1, 3/86 $5,(6 /2786
)$;81
$50 1(7:25.86%
0)323( 3:%
%=5
550 360RWRU
92 92 9
3)0 36)URQW0RWRU
$'80 $'80RWRU
3,&
,179/
,179
'&'&
'&'& $1<.(<
/68$6,& 9
9
,179/ '&'& '&'& 6+
/9'6 3:%
/'2
9 9 91 9
*$UUD\
9 /('
9 '5,9(5
/'3:% 81
3*0
9 9
)(7
,179 9B/'
9 9
91
/68)0 .(<%2$5'
3&83:% 81 $ULHV⋜2QO\
).&/?,%$&!8 RECEPTION ,%$ 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
9 92 )521786%
$
91B3' 91B3'
)(7 6.?0$ SERIES
SENSOR
3&8౪ +6
,&&$5' 5($'(5
9 91 91 91
$ 6. SERIES
SENSOR
$ ,17B&17
&2,1
).46 &OR /./&& OF RELAY 91
9(1'25
9 9
237,21
$
,179
7&3:%
,179
0&3:%
,179/ ,179
32)0
9
9/
)8)0
91 5SED IN THE SPEED CONTROL &!. ETC 9
352)0
9 9 9
350
91 9 9
+6 30&$6,& &3/'
91
710B%N
9B'6. 91 9
2))B&17 5<B&17
,35 -OTHER ,35 -OTHER
0)# CONTROL 0)# CONTROL
&1
%%&65. /) 61
'*1'
'*1'
9B)
9B) &1 &1 &1
Q&1&7B)$; 7;5/7+ 7;3/7+( &1
%%&=:+.% %%&=:+.%
)$;'B7;'B1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ &=+ &=+
'*1' % % '*1'
)$;'B7;'B3 31/B86%B'1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 31/B86%B'1 7['B3&8 % % 7['B3&8
9B RII 31/B86%B'3 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 31/B86%B'3 5['B3&8 %
Q5(6B)$; 86%B9%86 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 86%B9%86 % 5['B3&8
)$;&6B7;'B3 07B86%B571B3
/&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 07B86%B571B3 3573'BRXW % % 3573'BRXW
75$16B567 % % 75$16B567
)$; 3:% )$;&6B7;'B1 07B86%B571B1
/&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 07B86%B571B1
A. MFPC, LSU
9B) 3:0
&+B1 &+B1 3:0
9B) Q&1&7B)$1 &+B3 &+B3 Q&1&7B)$1
'*1' Q5(6B3,& &+B1 &+B1 Q5(6B3,&
3*1' 86%B)5B',6 &+B3 &+B3 86%B)5B',6
3:0
&+B1 &+B1 3:0
Q5(4B3,&B,17
&+B3 &+B3 Q5(4B3,&B,17
7;'B)$;B' &/.B1 &/.B1 7;'B)$;B'
&1 5;'B)$;B' &/.B3 % WR % &/.B3 5;'B)$;B'
%0%*+67%7 /) 61 Q576B)$;B' &+B1 &+B1 Q576B)$;B'
59B(&2 Q&76B)$;B' &+B3 &+B3 Q&76B)$;B'
'65B3&, 7;'B)$;B&6 &+B1 &+B1 7;'B)$;B&6
5;'B3&, 5;'B)$;B&6 &+B3 &+B3 5;'B)$;B&6
&76B3&, Q576B)$;B&6 (&/.B/68B1 (&/.B/68B1 Q576B)$;B&6
576B3&, 0)3& 3:% Q&76B)$;B&6 (&/.B/68B3 (&/.B/68B3 Q&76B)$;B&6
7;'B3&, Q5(6B)$; +6<1&B/68B3 +6<1&B/68B3 Q5(6B)$;
'75B3&, Q&1&7B)$; +6<1&B/68B1 +6<1&B/68B1 Q&1&7B)$;
*0' Q:8B)$; 96<1&B.B1 96<1&B.B1 Q:8B)$;
59B(&2 96<1&B.B3 96<1&B.B3 59B(&2
173B,17
96<1&B&B3 96<1&B&B3 173B,17
91
96<1&B&B1 96<1&B&B1 91
&1 91
96<1&B0B1 96<1&B0B1 91
8$5.- 91
96<1&B0B3 96<1&B0B3 91
9%86 1&
96<1&B<B3 96<1&B<B3 &76B/&'VXE
86% ' 9
96<1&B<B1 96<1&B<B1 9
' :2/$1B21 73B6&/ 73B6&/ :2/$1B21
+267 '*1' /&'6(/ 73B6'$ 73B6'$ /&'6(/
/&'6(/ 9/ 9/ /&'6(/
&1 '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
8%5.* '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
'*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
9%86 '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
86% ' '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
'
'(9,&( '*1' '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
'*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
'*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
&1 '*1' 9/
9/ '*1'
0-)5 '*1'
7;'B/&'VXE 7;'B/&'VXE '*1'
1&
5;'B/&'VXE 5;'B/&'VXE 1&
753 9 9 /68 81 GSL
753
753
/$1 753
753 /68 027+(5 3:% &1 &1
753 7;567+( 7;367+(
753 :3B.& :3B.&
753 6'$B.& 06B6(7B&BRQ 6'$B.& 06B6(7B&BRQ
&1 6&/B.& '7B& 6&/B.& '7B& &1
%0%B65667%
1& /'&+.B '7B& /'&+.B '7B& %%3+.6
&1 1& QB/'(55B< '7B& QB/'(55B< '7B& &1 1& 1&
'%5) 1& 1& QB/'(55B& '7B& QB/'(55B& '7B& 6%3+.6
1& 1& 1& 1&
1& 95()B& '7B. 95()B& '7B. 7+ 3+5 7+ /68 7+ 3:%
1& 3*&
&B5;' IRU 3,& 3*' Q(1%B<0& '7B. Q(1%B<0& '7B. '*1' '*1'
&B7;' 1& QB/'(55B. '7B. QB/'(55B. '7B. %'
&B'75 1& '*1' 95()B< '7B. 95()B< '7B. '*1'
56& '*1' 1& 92 Q6+B& '*1' Q6+B& '*1' 9'
&1 1& 933
&B'65 Q6+B< '*1' Q6+B< '*1'
&B576 6$73%% 95()B. 1& 95()B. 1&
+' '
6$7$ 3LQ GXULQJ 3 &1
9 %39+
9 9
9 9+'
'*1' '*1' &1
'*1' '*1' 1& %%3$6.
'*1' 9 1&
9+'
9+' Q)$15'< 1& UHVHUYH
3*1' 1&
9+'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
9 1&
9 1&
9 1&
LQFK 23(5$7,21 81
/ &' 81
&1
)+66+ )3 &
*1'
9$
9
/68 027+(5 3:% 6&1 &17 3:% 5
5
5
&1 5
%%3+'66 &1 &1 +56 &1 5
6&$1'$7$ %%3+'66 );0669 /9'6 ))&*3 );666+ 5
6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ *1' *1' 5
*1' 6&$1'$7$ Q/&' ',63 Q/&' ',63 5
6&$1'$7$ *1' /&'6(/B+ /&'6(/B+ *
6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ /&'6(/B+ /&'6(/B+ *
*1' *1' *1' *1' *
6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 *
6&$1'$7$ *1' /&'B$B0 /&'B$B0 *
*1 ' 6&$1'$7$ *1' *1' *
6&$1&/.287 1& 9 /&'B&/.B3 /&'B&/.B3 *
6&$1&/.287 6&$1'$7$ /&'B&/.B0 /&'B&/.B0 *
*1 ' *1' *1' *1' %
6&$1'$7$ 6&$1&/.287 /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 %
6&$1'$7$ *1' /&'B$B0 /&'B$B0 %
*1' 6&$1&/.287 *1' *1' %
31/B6(/ 1& 6&$1'$7$ /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 %
31/B6(/ 1& 6&$1'$7$ /&'B$B0 /&'B$B0 %
*1' *1' %
*1' /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 % /&' PRGXOH
/&'B'$7$ &1 /&'B$B0 /&'B$B0 &.
B. Scanner, operation panel
.(< 3:%
*HPLQL3OXV
)*1' )*1'
%837=6 /) 61
&=+596 &=+596 65$7 65$7
Q3:56:
*1'
1& *1' 1&
Q:8B.(<
Q,1)2B/('
32:B/('
:8B/(' 1RWXVHG
3$396
92
Q,1)2B/('
1& 1&
&1 &1 &1
%%3+'66 )+669 &&' ))&*3 )+669
*1' *1' *1'
563) *1' *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
'5,9(5 3:% 92 *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
9% *1' *1'
1& 9 *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
1& 9 *1' *1'
&1$ *1' &1B$)(B6'2 &1B$)(B6'2
C. Scanner, RSPF
&1
&1 %%3+.6
%%3+.6 (+5
0+36 0+36
1& Q$B31& *1' '*1'
1& Q$B&23< 93' 9
0+ 36
1& Q$B&$
1& Q$B5($'< 9+3/*/$
$8',725 25 1& Q$B$8'
237,21 1& 9 &1
1& *1' %%3+.6
1& 9 %%3+607%
0,0B$ 0,0B$
1& FRO 0,0B% 0,0B%
1& Q$B7& 0,0B$ 0,0B$ 0 ,0
1& 9 0,0B%
Q31&D 0,0B%
31&KDUQHVV *1' 50276)&3=
&1
%%3+.6
9& 9
*1' 2&6: 2 & 6:
2&6: *1'
9 9+3/*1/
6,=(B/('
6,=(B/(' 9
6,=(B/('
6,=(B/(' 256 /(' 3:%
*1'
65$7
&63DSHUIHHG81 ')'''6''&' ' ' ' ')'6&
')'363 ')99'93963999 9
65$7 * * * * * * * * 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
60591 60391&
3*1'
;5+3 ,179/
'*1' '59 3:% &1 ,179/
&/8' &/8' 3*1'
913' %837=3+
9+3*3$$ )*
1& &386 1& &1
1& 9 1& %%3+'66
;5+3
'*1' '*1' '+3'B.
&3(' &3(' &/8' '*1' 0DLQ'ULYH81
913' 913' 913'5
9+3*3$$ '*1' 785&B '+3'B.
&3(' &1 9 '*1' '+3'B.
;5+3 913' %%3+'66 '90B.B&. 913' 5
'*1' '*1' 1& &386 '90B.B' 9+3*363
&3)' &3)' &3)' 1& 9 '90B.B/'
913' 913' '*1' 60391& 60591
9+3*3$$ '*1' &/8' '+3'B&/ 785&B
'6:B& &3(' '*1' 9 785&
91 &3)' 913'5
'*1' ;5+3 &=+ 913' 785&B
'6:& '6:B& '6:B& 9
91 91 '90B&/B&. %%3$6.
9+3*3$$ 352)0B9 '90B&/B' ,179/
352)0B&17 '90B&/B/' 3*1'
71)' ;5+3 3*1' 1& 1&
352)0B/' '90B.B&.
7 1) ' '*1' 71)' '90B.B'
'90B.
46:%46== '*1' 1& 1&
%837=6 33' 3&8 3:% '90B.B/'
71)' 33'
%837=6 3*1' 0)
&=< '*1'
'*1' ;5+3 '*1' '*1' &/80
33' 33' 33' 33' '*1'
913' 913' 913' &66 '+3'B&/
9+3*3$$ '*1' '*1' 1& &66 '*1' '+3'B&/
33' 33' 1& &66 913' 5
;5+3
'*1' 913' 913' 1& &66 9+3*363
33' 33' )*1' )*1' &63'
913' &=+ &=+ 1& 1& 60391& 60591
9+3*3$/ 785&B
9 785&
65$7 65$7
D. CSS1, Paper feed, Transport, Main drive, RESI
36 8 1 %%3$6.
,179/
3*1'
1& 1&
%%3+.6 3+5 '90B&/B&. '90B&/
3*1' '90B&/B'
&/80 &/80 1& 1&
㺪㺼㺵㺚㺱㺎㺞 '90B&/B/'
0)
%%3+.6 3+5
&66
'*1'
&66 1&
1& 5(6, 81
&1 %837=6
%%&=:+.% &=< &=+ &=+
913' $ 1& 1& 1&
913' '*1' $ 1& 1& 1&
&63' &63' 5(*6B&B/(' $ 1& 1& 1&
'*1' 5(*6B& $ 1& 1& 1&
9+3/*1/ 3&6B& $ 1& 1& 1&
913'5 6%3+.6
3+5 91
+8'B0
9 '*1' 7++8'
7+B0
+8'B0 5'7&+)&3=
7+B0 60591 60391&
03:6 '*1'
03/' 91 %%3+.6
3+5
'6:$'8 +8'B0 '*1'
$33' 7+B0 03:6 03:6
32' 03:6 915
$'8*6 915 &3:%)46(
9 03/'
'*1' 1& 915
915 03/'
'*1'
915 1& 03/'
915
9+36*
6HFRQGDU\WUDQVIHU81
4536& 4533&
03('
9 60591 60391&
03)6
78' 78'
78' '*1' '*1' 78'
785& 913'5 913'5
9 785& 9+36*
7&&58 9
$33' '*1' 1& 60391& 60591
1& 1& 1& 7&&58 1& 785&
1& 1& 1& )*1' 9 785&
$'8*6
9
7)'
3573'
92
65$7 )*1' 65$7 65$7
9 )*
+8'B0
7+B0 65$7
03:6
03/' $33'
1& 1& 1& '*1' $33'
$'80 $ 913'5
$'80 $ 9+36*
$'80 %
$'80 %
%%3+.6
'6:$'8 1&
$33'
32' $'80B/B287B$
$'80B/B287B%
%%3+'66
'*1'
915
'*1'
915
'*1' 1&
'*1' 5LJKWIHHGWUD\(;81
'*1'
913'5
'*1'
913'5
%%3+.6
&1 &1 350B%
%%3+'66 %%3+'66 350B$
91 91 350B% 9
+/3&' +/3&' +/3&' 350B$ 9 35 0
'*1' '*1' 350B% 350B%
9+3/*1/ '*1' 350B$ 350B$
+/287B0$,1 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼᭷
+/3:% +/287B68% 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼᭷
+/287B/2: 260B%
%%3$6. )80B&. 260B$
F. Paper exit, Frame fusing, DRV PWB
&1
%%&=:+. &=<
'9&58B0 $ 1&
'9B7<36(/B0 $
'*1' $
'97<3B0 $
76*B0 $
91 $7&B9 $
7&6B0 $ '9 81 <(//2:
'*1' $ 6255)&0*' /) 61 5)&3625-0
9 '9&58B9 $ 1& &653. 1 5)&<3=6
'9&58B< $ 1& 1& '9&58B< 1&
'9B7<36(/B<$ '9B7<36(/B< 1&
'*1' $ '*1'
'97<3B< $ '97<3B< 3+5
76*B< $ 76*B< 76*B<
91 $7&B9 $ 91 $7&B9 91 $7&B9
7&6B< $ 7&6B< 7&6B< 7&6B<
'*1' $ '*1' '*1'
9 '9&58B9 $ 1& 1& 9 '9&58B9 1&
H. Process, DV, High voltage
65$7
:LUHMXPSHU
6SULQJ 7&. )*
:LUHMXPSHU 7& 3:%
6SULQJ 7&&
:LUHMXPSHU
&1
6SULQJ 7&0
%%3$6. &1 '9 81 &<$1
:LUHMXPSHU 1& )*1' 1& %%3+'66
7& 8 1 6255)&0*' /) 61 5)&3625-0
6SULQJ 7&< 37&B(55 37&B(55 &=+
+9B5(0 +9B5(0 &653. 1 5)&<3=6
'9&58B& % 1& 1& '9&58B& 1&
7&B/' 7&B/' '9B7<36(/B& % '9B7<36(/B& 1&
7&B&/. 7&B&/. '*1' % '*1'
:LUHMXPSHU 7&B'$7$ 7&B'$7$ '97<3B& % '97<3B& 3+5
6SULQJ 9&$6( 3*1' 3*1'
,179 ,179 76*B& % 76*B& 76*B&
91 $7&B9 % 91 $7&B9 91 $7&B9
7&6B& % 7&6B& 7&6B& 7&6B&
36 36
7& :+ 7& '*1' % '*1' '*1'
9 '9&58B9 % 1& 1& 9 '9&58B9 1&
36 36 '9&58B. % 1&
37& 5' 37& '9B7<36(/B.%
'*1' %
'97<3B. %
76*B. %
91 $7&B9 %
7&6B. %
'*1' %
9 '9&58B9 % 1&
' 9 81 %/$&.
6255)&0*' /) 61 5)&3625-0
&653. 1 5)&<3=6
3&8 3:% 1& '9&58B. 1&
'9B7<36(/B. 1&
36 5' 36 '*1'
0&. 0&.
'97<3B. 3+5
0& 3:% 76*B. 76*B.
91 $7&B9 91 $7&B9
7&6B. 7&6B. 7&6B.
36 5' 36 '*1' '*1'
0&&0< 0&&0< 1& 9 '9&58B9 1&
&1
%%3$6. &1
)*1' 1& %%3+'66
0&B%.B(55 0&B%.B(55
:LUHMXPSHU 0&B&/B(55 0&B&/B(55
+9B5(0 +9B5(0
6SULQJ *%.
:LUHMXPSHU +9B/' +9B/'
6SULQJ %6. +9B&/. +9B&/.
:LUHMXPSHU +9B'$7$ +9B'$7$
3*1' 3*1'
6SULQJ *%& &1
,179 ,179 %%3+'66
:LUHMXPSHU
6SULQJ %6& '*1' '*1'
9 %39+
9 '6:5 369
9B'6. '6:5 D '6:5
1& '59 3:% '6:) E '6:) '6:)
9 3*1'
9
3*1'
&1
%39+%
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
&1
%39+ /) 61
9 9
9
*1'
9 6&1 &17 3:%
9
*1'
&1
%39+%
9
9
9
'*1'
'*1'
&1
%39+%
,179
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
91
91
91
91 1& &1
91 1& %39+ /) 61
$&'& 3:% 9
'*1'
91
'*1'
9
&1
%39+%
9
9
9
'*1' /68 027+(5
3:%
&1
&1 %39+ /) 61
%39+% 9
'*1' 3*1'
'*1' '*1'
92 92
9/ 9/
9/ 9/
'&&17 Q5<
'&&17 Q2))
&1
%%3$6. /) 61
㹬5<B&17 &17
Q2))B&17 &17
*1'
,179
60591 60391&
36)0B9
36)0 3*1'
36)0B/'
ڧ
&1
%39+%
1HXWUDO3&,BRXW
1& 3&, 237,21
/LYH3&,BRXW
1RQFRQWDFW 6059% 6039%&
7+B80B&6B,1
7+B80 7+B80B,1
'*1'
(;2QO\
&1
&1 %39/
(/59 (/39 %39+%( /LYH+/BRXW
/LYH5 LQ /LYH5 LQ 1& 1&
5($&725 /LYH5 RXW 1& 1HXWUDO+/BRXW
/LYH5 RXW
$&'& 3:%
237,21 &1
%39/5 9/39 9/59 36 :+ 06:
3&8 3:% /LYHBLQ /LYH /LYH
&1 1& 1HXWUDO 36 :+
1HXWUDOB:+
&1
(;&1 %39+5 :+6: &1
36 %39/ (;
%39+ /LYHB:+ /LYHB:+ /LYHBLQ
1HXWUDB:+ 1HXWUDB:+ 1HXWUDOB:+ 1& 36
:+&6 /LYHB:+ /LYHB:+ 1& /LYHB:+6: /LYHB:+6:
$& 3:% 1&
/LYHB:+ 1HXWUDOBLQ
(/39 (/59 (/39 (/59
65$7
&1 (;
%39/
/LYHBLQ /LYHBLQ
1& )*1'
(;&1 &1 &1 1HXWUDOBLQ 1HXWUDOBLQ
%39+ %39+%. %39+%.
1HXWUDB:+ 1HXWUDOB:+ 1HXWUDOB:+ 1HXWUDOB:+
:+6&1 /LYHB:+ 1& 1& 1& ,1/(7
(/39 (/59 /LYHB:+ /LYHB:+ /LYHB:+
65$7
6&1
237,21
/68 027+(5 3:%
&1 &1 %837=6 /) 61
%%&65. %0%*+67%7 /) 61 &=+596
3*1' ,& &DUG 6+,(/' 6+,(/'
'*1' *1' *1'
91 ' ' ,& &DUG
91 ' '
Q&1& 7B)$ ; 9%86 9%86
)$;B7;'B'B1 )URQW 6+,(/' 1&
)$;B7;'B'B3 *1'
9/ '
Q5(6B)$; ' 23(5$7,21 81
)$;B7;'B&6B3 9%86
)$;B7;'B&6B1
'*1' %%3$6. 86%$
)$;B5;'B'B1 3$396
)$;B5;'B'B3 6+,(/' 6+(//
*1' *1'
Q:8B )$;
)$;B5;'B&6B3 ' ' 86%
)$; 3:% )$;B5;'B&6B1 ' '
9/ 9%86 9%86
'*1' 86%㺘㺦㺖㺞3:%
Q)$; B576 B'
'*1'
Q&76 B)$; B'
91
Q576B)$;B&6 65$7
9 2 37, 2 1
Q&76B)$;B&6
K. USB, Option (Desk, Finisher)
9
91 3$/59 3$396 3$396 3$/59
91 &1 *<
'*1' %0%*+67%7 /) 61 )*1' )*1' )*1'
86% .H\ERDUG 6+,(/' 6+,(/' 6+,(/' *< 6+,(/'
3*1' *<
*1' *1' *1' *1'
' %5 .H\ERDUG3:%
' ' /% '
' ' ' '
9%86 9%86 9%86 %/ 9%86
67$*('(6. 237,21
&1
%%3$6.
9B'6.
'6.*1'
91
'*1'
'*1'
7['B'6. 67$*('(6. 237,21
5['B'6.
'75B'6.
3& 8 3: % '65B'6.
5(6B'6.
75&B'6.
&1 1& 8$57B'6.
%%31'=6
9
'*1' &1
&9B&23< %%31'=6
&38&
& 9B&2 817 9
& 9B67 $57
&386
65$7
MOTOR DRIVER PWB
CN G PHR-6R PHR-6 SPUM
SPUMA/ 1 6 SPUMA/
+24VPD_SPUM 2 5 +24VPD _SPUM
SPUMA 3 4 SPUMA
SPUMB 4 3 SPUMB
+24VPD_SPUM 5 2 +24VPD _SPUM
L. RSPF
CN D PHDR-10VS-2
(+5VPD) 1
+5VPD 2 SRA-21T-4
N.C. 3
SPPD4 4
(GND2) 5 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 7 SPPD4
STMPU 8 1 +5VPD
STMPS/ 9 2 SPPD4 GP1A73
+24VPD STMPS 10 3 GND2
B10B-PHDSS-B
179228-4 179228-4
1 GND2 4 (OPTION)
2 STMPU 3 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
3 STMPS/ 2
4 +24VPD STMPS 1
STMPS
292254-4
179228-3
CN H PHR-10 SPLS
+5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1 GP1S73P2
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
SPLS2 5
+5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
AVCC 7 SPLS2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2 GP1S73P2
N.C. 10 3 +5VPD SPLS2
B10B-PH-K-S
Example:
4RADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
v -ICROSOFT¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ -E 7INDOWS .4¤
7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 80 7INDOWS¤ 6ISTA 7INDOWS¤
7INDOWS¤ 3ERVER 7INDOWS¤ 3ERVER AND )NTERNET %XPLORER¤
ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF -ICROSOFT #ORPORATION IN THE 53!
AND OTHER COUNTRIES
v 0OST3CRIPT IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v -ACINTOSH -AC /3 !PPLE4ALK %THER4ALK ,ASER 7RITER AND 3AFARI ARE REGISTERED
TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF !PPLE #OMPUTER )NC
v )"- 0#!4 AND 0OWER 0# ARE TRADEMARKS OF )NTERNATIONAL "USINESS -ACHINES
#ORPORATION
v !CROBAT¤ 2EADER #OPYRIGHT¤ !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED !LL RIGHTS
RESERVED !DOBE THE !DOBE LOGO !CROBAT AND THE !CROBAT LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF
!DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v 0#, IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF THE (EWLETT 0ACKARD #OMPANY
v 3HARPDESK IS A TRADEMARK OF 3HARP #ORPORATION
v !LL OTHER TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS ARE THE PROPERTY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE OWNERS
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions CS Promotion Center II
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2012 September Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution